EP3661752B1 - System including printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming device - Google Patents
System including printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- EP3661752B1 EP3661752B1 EP17751863.6A EP17751863A EP3661752B1 EP 3661752 B1 EP3661752 B1 EP 3661752B1 EP 17751863 A EP17751863 A EP 17751863A EP 3661752 B1 EP3661752 B1 EP 3661752B1
- Authority
- EP
- European Patent Office
- Prior art keywords
- cartridge
- ink
- ink cartridge
- printing
- wall
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Active
Links
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 title claims description 77
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 claims description 110
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 claims description 61
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 claims description 61
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 claims description 22
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 claims description 5
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 70
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 34
- 238000012856 packing Methods 0.000 description 33
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 32
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 29
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 16
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 16
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 15
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 15
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 12
- 210000000078 claw Anatomy 0.000 description 9
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 7
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000000638 solvent extraction Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000003116 impacting effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002238 attenuated effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002427 irreversible effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011148 porous material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine atom Chemical compound [F] YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005830 Polyurethane Foam Polymers 0.000 description 1
- XECAHXYUAAWDEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Chemical compound C=CC=C.C=CC#N.C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 XECAHXYUAAWDEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000122 acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004676 acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000006229 carbon black Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000052 comparative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000806 elastomer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000840 ethylene tetrafluoroethylene copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002493 poly(chlorotrifluoroethylene) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005023 polychlorotrifluoroethylene (PCTFE) polymer Substances 0.000 description 1
- -1 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001343 polytetrafluoroethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229940058401 polytetrafluoroethylene Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000004810 polytetrafluoroethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011496 polyurethane foam Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/1752—Mounting within the printer
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/17543—Cartridge presence detection or type identification
- B41J2/17546—Cartridge presence detection or type identification electronically
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/17553—Outer structure
Definitions
- the present disclosure relates to a system including a printing-fluid cartridge and a printing-fluid consuming device on which the printing-fluid cartridge is mountable.
- Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-129178 discloses an ink cartridge including an IC board and an ink supply portion.
- the IC board is disposed at an upper surface of the ink cartridge.
- the ink supply portion is provided at a front surface of the ink cartridge. In a state where this ink cartridge is attached to a case of a printer, electrodes on the IC board are in contact with contacts provided at the case, and the ink supply portion is connected to an ink needle provided at the case.
- EP 2 607 088 A2 shows the same drawbacks as the ink cartridge of the above-mentioned Japanese patent application, publication Nr. 2013129178 .
- the impact of the dropping may be imparted on the ink cartridge mounted in the printer. Due to the impact, the ink supply portion may be damaged and broken, and the electrodes of the IC board may be scratched or damaged. Further, if the ink supply portion comes off the ink needle due to the falling impact, ink stored in the ink cartridge may be scattered, resulting in contamination of the electrodes of the IC board.
- the impact from the fall imparted onto the mounted ink cartridge may be mitigated by guide plates provided in an internal space of the case of the printer.
- the guide plates partition the internal space of the case into a plurality of spaces each configured to accommodate the ink cartridge therein.
- conflicting relationship is found between improvement in rigidity of the case and operability of the ink cartridge at the time of insertion and removal.
- an increase in dimension of the guide plates in an insertion direction of the ink cartridge can enhance rigidity of the case, but makes it difficult for a user to hold the side walls of the ink cartridge by fingers, thereby making user's insertion and removal of the ink cartridge difficult to perform.
- a decrease in dimension of the guide plates in the insertion direction of the ink cartridge can facilitate the user's insertion and removal of the ink cartridge relative to the case, but may lower rigidity of the case.
- the ink cartridge mounted in the case is susceptible to damages attributed to the impact from the fall of the printer.
- the supply portion is disposed at the lower end portion of the cartridge body, the electrical interface is disposed at the upper surface of the cartridge body, and the electrical interface is disposed upstream of the supply portion in the insertion direction.
- a path of a relatively large length is provided from the supply portion to the electrical interface to avoid adhesion of scattered printing fluid onto the electrical interface.
- the plate has: the main part, at least part of which is overlapped with at least part of the supply portion of the attached cartridge when viewed in the widthwise direction; and the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part protruding from the lower and upper end portions of the main part, respectively, in the opposite direction such that a gap is formed between the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part in the up-down direction.
- the upper protruding part has: the first region whose distance from the upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction is equal to the distance of the electrical interface of the attached cartridge from the upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction; and the second region disposed upstream of the first region in the insertion direction.
- the main part extends over the entire length of the inside of the cartridge attachment section in the up-down direction.
- the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part have such sizes in the up-down direction that the length of the gap between the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part at the first region is smaller than that of the gap between the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part at the second region.
- the supply tube and the supply portion are connected together at a connecting position in the insertion direction, and that the main part of the plate is overlapped with the connecting position when viewed in the widthwise direction in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge.
- the main part of the plate can ensure protection of the connecting position between the supply tube and the supply portion.
- the electrical interface in contact with the electrical contact at a contact position, and that in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge, a distance of a portion in the first region of the upper protruding part from the upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction is equal to a distance of the contact position from the upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction.
- the upper protruding part of the plate can ensure protection of the contact position between the electrical interface and the electrical contact.
- the upper protruding part of the plate further has a third region positioned downstream relative to the first region in the insertion direction, the length of the gap between the lower protruding part and the first region of the upper protruding part being greater than a length of the gap between the lower protruding part and the third region of the upper protruding part.
- the printing-fluid cartridge can be easily attached to and detached from the cartridge attachment section.
- a plurality of the plates are provided in the cartridge attachment section so as to be arrayed in the widthwise direction with a space being formed between neighboring plates, the printing-fluid cartridge being attached to the cartridge attachment section at a position between the neighboring plates.
- the plates can suppress the electrical interface of the printing-fluid cartridge from being contaminated by printing-liquid leaking out of a neighboring cartridge.
- the cartridge body has a portion positioned upward relative to the supply portion and downstream relative to a downstream end of the supply portion in the insertion direction.
- printing-fluid cartridge may leak from the supply portion. If this is the case, the portion of the cartridge body that is upward relative to the supply portion and downstream relative to the downstream end of the supply portion in the insertion direction can receive the printing fluid leaking from the supply portion. Therefore, the electrical interface of the printing-fluid cartridge can be suppressed from being contaminated by the printing fluid.
- the cartridge attachment section has an upstream end in the insertion direction formed with an insertion opening
- the printing-fluid consuming device further includes a cover configured to open and close the insertion opening, and that the cover is closed in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge.
- the closed cover can prevent the printing-fluid cartridge from being detached from the cartridge attachment section.
- the printing-fluid consuming device further includes a lock portion provided at the cartridge attachment section, and that the cartridge body has a lock surface disposed at the upper surface, the lock surface being positioned upstream relative to the electrical interface in the insertion direction, the lock surface being configured to engage with the lock portion.
- the engagement between the lock surface and the lock portion can prevent the printing-fluid cartridge from being detached from the cartridge attachment section.
- the printing-fluid consuming device further includes a sensor provided at the cartridge attachment section and configured to emit a sensing light travelling in the widthwise direction
- the printing-fluid cartridge further includes a protrusion disposed at the upper surface, the protrusion being positioned downstream relative to the electrical interface in the insertion direction, the protrusion having a detection surface configured to be detected by the sensor.
- the electrical interface is positioned upstream relative to the protrusion in the insertion direction, the path of a large length is provided from the supply portion to the electrical interface to avoid adhesion of scattered printing fluid onto the electrical interface.
- the present disclosure can protect the supply portion and the electrical interface against impacting force due to falling of the system, and can also ensure user's operability for inserting and removing the printing-fluid cartridge.
- a system 1 including an ink cartridge 30 and a printer 10 to which the ink cartridge 30 is detachably attachable will be described with reference to Figs. 1 through 28 , wherein like parts and components are designated by the same reference numerals to avoid duplicating description.
- a combination of the ink cartridge 30 and the printer 10 constitutes the system 1.
- a direction in which the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into a cartridge attachment section 110 of the printer 10 is defined as a "frontward direction 51,” while a direction in which the ink cartridge 30 is removed from the cartridge attachment section 110 is defined as a “rearward direction 52.”
- the frontward direction 51 and the rearward direction 52 are opposite to each other.
- the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into and removed from the cartridge attachment section 110 in a horizontal direction.
- Both the frontward direction 51 and the rearward direction 52 are therefore regarded as directions parallel to the horizontal direction.
- the frontward direction 51 and the rearward direction 52 need not be parallel to the horizontal direction.
- a direction perpendicular to the frontward direction 51 or the rearward direction 52 is defined as a "downward direction 53."
- a direction opposite to the downward direction 53 is defined as an "upward direction 54.”
- a direction perpendicular to the frontward direction 51 and the downward direction 53 is defined as a "rightward direction 55.”
- a direction opposite to the rightward direction 55 is defined as a "leftward direction 56.”
- the rightward direction 55 and the leftward direction 56 are also parallel to the horizontal direction.
- the rightward direction 55 and the leftward direction 56 need not be parallel to the horizontal direction.
- the downward direction 53 is coincident with a direction of a gravitational force acting on the ink cartridge 30 (i.e. gravitational direction), and the upward direction 54 is coincident with a direction opposite to the gravitational direction. Therefore, in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 and capable of being used by the printer 10, an outer surface of a main bottom wall portion 42 (described later) of a cartridge casing 130 (described later) faces downward, that is, faces in the gravitational direction. Further, at this state, the frontward direction 51 and the rearward direction 52 are perpendicular to the gravitational direction.
- the rightward direction 55 and the leftward direction 56 are defined as directions perpendicular to the frontward direction 51 and the downward direction 53. More specifically, in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 and is capable of being used by the printer 10, the rightward direction 55 is a direction toward the right and the leftward direction 56 is a direction toward the left when the ink cartridge 30 is viewed from a rear side thereof.
- a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 or a state where the ink cartridge 30 is capable of being operated by the printer 10 implies a state of the ink cartridge 30 when the ink cartridge 30 has been completely inserted into an attachment position in the cartridge attachment section 110.
- an ink needle 102 provided at the cartridge attachment section 110 is inserted into an ink supply portion 34 of the ink cartridge 30 to be coupled to the ink supply portion 34, and an IC board 64 (described later) provided at the ink cartridge 30 is in contact with contacts 106 (described later) provided at the cartridge attachment section 110.
- a posture of the ink cartridge 30 in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 or a state where the ink cartridge 30 is capable of being operated by the printer 10 will be referred to as an "operational posture.”
- the operational posture of the ink cartridge 30 will also be referred to as an "upright posture.”
- frontward direction 51 and the rearward direction 52 may be collectively referred to as a "front-rear direction.”
- the upward direction 54 and the downward direction 53 may be collectively referred to as an "up-down direction.”
- the rightward direction 55 and the leftward direction 56 may be collectively referred to as a "left-right direction.”
- an expression “facing frontward” means “facing in a direction containing a frontward component
- an expression “facing rearward” means “facing in a direction containing a rearward component”
- an expression “facing downward” means “facing in a direction containing a downward component”
- an expression “facing upward” means “facing in a direction containing an upward component.”
- a phrase “A front surface faces frontward.” denotes that the front surface may face in the frontward direction, or the front surface may face in a direction inclined relative to the frontward direction as long as the direction contains a frontward component.
- the printer 10 is an image recording apparatus configured to selectively eject ink droplets onto recording sheets to record images thereon based on an inkjet recording system.
- the printer 10 is, for example, an inkjet printer.
- the printer 10 includes a recording head 21, an ink supplying device 100, and ink tubes 20 connecting the recording head 21 to the ink supplying device 100.
- the ink supplying device 100 includes the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the cartridge attachment section 110 can detachably accommodate a plurality of ink cartridges 30.
- the cartridge attachment section 110 has an opening 112 in one side thereof. Through the opening 112, each of the ink cartridges 30 can be inserted into the cartridge attachment section 110 in the frontward direction 51 and removed from the cartridge attachment section 110 in the rearward direction 52.
- ink cartridges 30 corresponding to respective four colors of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black can be accommodated in the cartridge attachment section 110 of the ink supply device 100.
- ink cartridge 30 only one ink cartridge 30 is assumed to be attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 unless otherwise specified.
- the ink cartridge 30 stores liquid therein. Specifically, the ink cartridge 30 stores ink therein that can be used for printing operations performed in the printer 10.
- the ink cartridge 30 is connected to the recording head 21 through the corresponding ink tube 20.
- the recording head 21 has a plurality of (four in the embodiment) damper chambers 28 corresponding to the plurality of ink cartridges 30. Each damper chamber 28 is adapted to temporarily store the ink supplied from the corresponding ink cartridge 30 through the corresponding ink tube 20.
- the recording head 21 also includes a plurality of nozzles 29 through which the ink supplied from the respective damper chambers 28 is selectively ejected.
- the recording head 21 is provided with a head control board (not illustrated), and a plurality of piezoelectric elements 29A corresponding one-on-one to the plurality of nozzles 29.
- the head control board is configured to selectively apply drive voltages to the plurality of piezoelectric elements 29A to eject ink selectively from the nozzles 29. In this way, the recording head 21 is configured to consume ink stored in each ink cartridge 30 that has been attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the printer 10 includes a sheet feeding tray 15, a sheet feeding roller 23, a pair of conveying rollers 25, a platen 26, a pair of discharge rollers 27, and a sheet discharge tray 16.
- the sheet feeding roller 23 feeds recording sheets from the sheet feeding tray 15 onto a conveying path 24.
- the recording sheets conveyed to the conveying path 24 are then received by the pair of conveying rollers 25.
- the pair of conveying rollers 25 conveys the recording sheets over the platen 26.
- the recording head 21 selectively ejects ink onto the recording sheets as the recording sheets passes over the platen 26, whereby images are recorded on the recording sheets.
- the pair of discharge rollers 27 receives the recording sheets that have passed over the platen 26 and discharges the recoding sheets onto the sheet discharge tray 16 provided at a position most downstream in the conveying path 24.
- the ink supplying device 100 is provided in the printer 10.
- the ink supplying device 100 is configured to supply ink to the recording head 21.
- the ink supplying device 100 includes the cartridge attachment section 110, a plurality of (four in the embodiment) tanks 103, and the plurality of (four in the embodiment) ink tubes 20.
- the ink cartridges 30 are detachably attachable to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- Fig. 1 illustrates a state where the ink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to the cartridge attachment section 110. That is, in Fig. 1 , the ink cartridge 30 is its attached state where the ink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to the cartridge attachment section 110. In other words, the ink cartridge 30 illustrated in Fig. 1 is in its operational posture described above.
- the cartridge attachment section 110 includes a case 101, a plurality of (four in the embodiment) ink needles 102, a plurality of (four in the embodiment) projection plates 111, a plurality of (four in the embodiment) optical sensors 113, and a plurality of sets (four sets in the embodiment) of contacts 106.
- four types of ink cartridges 30 corresponding to four colors of ink, i.e. cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, are detachably mountable in the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the four ink needles 102, the four projection plates 111, and the four optical sensors 113 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four ink cartridges 30.
- Each contacts 106 are provided for one ink cartridge 30. Accordingly, four sets of four contacts 106, that is, a total of 16 (sixteen) contacts 106 are provided for the four ink cartridges 30.
- the four tanks 103 and the four ink tubes 20 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four ink cartridges 30.
- the case 101 constitutes a housing of the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the case 101 has a generally box-like shape defining an internal space.
- the case 101 has an inner top surface 57, an inner bottom surface, an inner right-side surface 107, an inner left-side surface 108, an inner end surface 59, and the opening 112.
- the inner top surface 57 defines the top of the internal space of the case 101.
- the inner bottom surface defines the bottom of the internal space of the case 101.
- the inner right-side surface 107 defines the right of the internal space of the case 101.
- the inner left-side surface 108 defines the left of the internal space of the case 101.
- the inner end surface 59 connects the inner top surface 57, the inner bottom surface, the inner right-side surface 107, and the inner left-side surface 108.
- the opening 112 is formed in the case 101 at a position facing the inner end surface 59 in the front-rear direction. The opening 112 can be exposed to a user-interface surface of the printer 10 that a user can face when operating the printer 10.
- the case 101 has a bottom portion formed with a plurality of (four in the embodiment) guide grooves 109 for guiding insertion and removal of the ink cartridges 30 relative to the case 101. Movements of the respective ink cartridges 30 in the front-rear direction (i.e., in Fig. 2 , a direction perpendicular to a sheet surface) are guided by the corresponding guide grooves 109 as lower end portions of the ink cartridges 30 are inserted into the corresponding guide grooves 109.
- the case 101 has three plates 104 ( Fig. 2 ) that partition the internal space into four individual spaces each elongated in the up-down direction. Each of the four spaces partitioned by the plates 104 can receive corresponding one of the four ink cartridges 30.
- each ink needle 102 has a hollow tubular shape and is disposed at a lower end portion of an end wall (i.e. a wall having the inner end surface 59) of the case 101.
- the ink needles 102 are arranged at positions corresponding to the corresponding ink supply portions 34 of the ink cartridges 30 accommodated in the cartridge attachment section 110.
- Each ink needle 102 protrudes rearward from the inner end surface 59 of the case 101 and is open at its distal end (i.e. rear end).
- each ink needle 102 may have a flat-shaped tip or a pointed tip.
- a plurality of projections 105 are formed on the inner right-side surface 107, the inner left-side surface 108, and the plates 104 of the case 101.
- the projections 105 are provided at the case 101 in the vicinity of the ink needles 102.
- four projections 105 are provided for each ink needle 102. More specifically, when viewed in an insertion direction that the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into the cartridge attachment section 110 (i.e. frontward direction 51), the four projections 105 are respectively positioned at an upper-right side, an upper-left side, a lower-right side and a lower-left side relative to each ink needle 102.
- the four projections 105 include a projection 105A, a projection 105B, a projection 105C, and a projection 105D.
- the projection 105A is disposed at the upper-right side relative to the ink needle 102.
- the projection 105B is disposed at the upper-left side relative to the ink needle 102.
- the projection 105C is disposed at the lower-right side relative to the ink needle 102.
- the projection 105D is disposed at the lower-left side relative to the ink needle 102.
- the four projections 105A, 105B, 105C, and 105D will also be collectively referred to as "projections 105.” As illustrated in Fig. 15 , the projections 105 extend in the front-rear direction.
- Each projection 105 has a first guide surface 196 and a second guide surface 197.
- reference signs 196 and 197 appear only on the first guide surfaces 196 and the second guide surfaces 197 of the projections 105A, 105B, 105C, and 105D positioned in the rightmost space of the case 101.
- the first guide surface 196 is a plane extending in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction.
- the second guide surface 197 is a plane extending in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.
- the second guide surface 197 is connected to the first guide surface 196. Incidentally, the first guide surface 196 and the second guide surface 197 need not be connected to each other.
- the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105A and the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105C oppose each other and are spaced apart from each other in the up-down direction.
- the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105B and the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105D oppose each other and are spaced apart from each other in the up-down direction.
- the second guide surface 197 of the projection 105A and the second guide surface 197 of the projection 105B oppose each other and spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction.
- the second guide surface 197 of the projection 105C and the second guide surface 197 of the projection 105D oppose each other and are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction.
- the projections 105 need not be positioned at the upper-right side, the upper-left side, the lower-right side, and the lower-left side relative to each ink needle 102.
- the projections 105 may be positioned at a left side, a right side, an upper side, and a lower side relative to each ink needle 102. Further, three or less projections 105, or five or more projections 105 may be provided for each ink needle 102.
- a projection plate 111 is provided in each of the four spaces of the case 101 in which one of the four ink cartridges 30 can be accommodated. Accordingly, four projection plates 111 are provided at the case 101, with one in each of the four cartridge-accommodating spaces. Specifically, the projection plates 111 each protrude, in the respective cartridge-accommodating spaces, downward from the inner top surface 57 of the case 101 at positions near the opening 112. Each projection plate 111 has a dimension in the left-right direction smaller than a gap distance between a pair of walls 114 constituting a protruding portion 43 (see Fig. 4 , described later) of the ink cartridge 30.
- the projection plate 111 is located between the pair of walls 114 in the left-right direction when the ink cartridge 30 has been inserted into the cartridge attachment section 110. During the insertion process of the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge attachment section 110, the projection plate 111 advances into a space between the pair of walls 114 of the protruding portion 43 of the ink cartridge 30. When the ink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to the cartridge attachment section 110, the projection plate 111 is positioned between the pair of walls 114 in the left-right direction, as illustrated in Fig. 3 .
- the projection plate 111 has a bottom surface 111A capable of abutting against a lever 163 of a valve mechanism 135 (see Fig 3 , described later).
- a set of the four contacts 106 (only one contact is shown in Fig. 3 ) is disposed in each of the four cartridge-accommodating spaces of the case 101.
- the set of the four contacts 106 is disposed on the inner top surface 57, in each cartridge-accommodating space of the case 101, at a position frontward of the projection plate 111.
- the set of the four contacts 106 protrudes downward from the inner top surface 57 into the cartridge-accommodating space of the case 101.
- the four contacts 106 are arranged spaced apart from one another in the left-right direction, although not illustrated in the drawings in detail.
- the four contacts 106 in each set are arranged at positions respectively corresponding to four electrodes 65 (described later, see Fig. 4 ) provided at each of the ink cartridges 30.
- Each contact 106 is formed of a material having electrical conductivity and resiliency. The contacts 106 can thus be resiliently deformable upward.
- four sets of the four contacts 106 are provided each set for each of the four ink cartridges 30 that can be accommodated in the case 101. Hence, a total of 16 (sixteen) contacts 106 are provided at the case 101.
- the contacts 106 and the electrodes 65 may be provided in any number desired.
- Each of the contacts 106 is electrically connected to an arithmetic unit (not illustrated) of the printer 10 via an electric circuit.
- the arithmetic unit may include a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, for example.
- the arithmetic unit may function as, for example, a controller of the printer 10.
- a voltage Vc is applied to one of the four electrodes 65; another of the four electrodes 65 is grounded; a signal indicative of data is transmitted to another of the four electrodes 65, and a synchronization signal is transmitted from the arithmetic unit to the other of the four electrodes 65.
- the arithmetic unit can access data stored in an IC of the ink cartridge 30. Output from each of the contacts 106 via the electric circuit is inputted into the arithmetic unit.
- the four optical sensors 113 are disposed on the inner top surface 57 of the case 101. Specifically, each of the optical sensors 113 is disposed, in each cartridge-accommodating space of the case 101, at a position frontward of the set of the four contacts 106.
- Each of the optical sensors 113 includes a light emitter and a light receiver. The light emitter and the light receiver oppose each other in the left-right direction. Specifically, the light emitter is located leftward or rightward of the light receiver with a space therebetween.
- the attached ink cartridge 30 is positioned between the light emitter and the light receiver of the corresponding optical sensor 113.
- the light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor 113 are arranged at positions opposing each other such that the light-blocking plate 67 of the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 is positioned between the light emitter and the light receiver.
- Each optical sensor 113 is adapted to output different detection signals depending on whether or not the light receiver has received light emitted in the left-right direction from the light emitter. For example, the optical sensor 113 outputs a low-level signal when the light receiver fails to receive the light emitted from the light emitter (that is, when an intensity of the light received by the light receiver is smaller than a prescribed value). On the other hand, the optical sensor 113 outputs a high-level signal when the light receiver receives the light emitted from the light emitter (that is, when the intensity of the received light is equal to or greater than the prescribe value).
- a lock shaft 145 is provided at the case 101.
- the lock shaft 145 extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the inner top surface 57 and the opening 112 of the case 101.
- the lock shaft 145 is a rod-like member extending in the left-right direction.
- the lock shaft 145 is formed of metal and has a columnar shape, for example.
- the lock shaft 145 has left and right end portions fixed to walls defining left and right ends of the case 101. Hence, the lock shaft 145 is immovable, for example, not pivotable, relative to the case 101.
- the lock shaft 145 extends in the left-right direction, spanning the four cartridge-accommodating spaces of the case 101 each in which the ink cartridge 30 can be accommodated. In each of the cartridge-accommodating spaces, a space exists around the lock shaft 145.
- a lock surface 151 (described later) of each ink cartridge 30 can therefore access the lock shaft 145 by moving upward or rearward.
- the term “access” may imply either a physical access or contact (such as, contact that the lock shaft 145 contacts the lock surface 151), or an optical access (such as, exposure of the light-blocking plate 67 (described later) to light emitted from the optical sensor 113).
- the term “access” may imply an electrical access (such as, establishment of electrical connection between the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 (described later) and the contacts 106 to allow a current to flow therebetween when the contacts 106 contact the electrodes 65.
- the access may be achieved in the up-down direction or in the left-right direction. The access may alternatively be achieved in the front-rear direction.
- the lock shaft 145 is adapted to retain the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 at the attachment position.
- the ink cartridge 30 is brought into engagement with the lock shaft 145 when the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into the cartridge attachment section 110 and pivotally moved to the operational posture. Further, the lock shaft 145 retains the ink cartridge 30 at the attachment position in the cartridge attachment section 110 against an urging force of a coil spring 78 (see Fig. 3 ) of the ink cartridge 30 that pushes the ink cartridge 30 rearward.
- each tank 103 is provided at a position frontward of the case 101.
- the tank 103 has a box-like shape that allows ink to be stored therein.
- the tank 103 has an atmosphere communication port 124 at its top portion. Through the atmosphere communication port 124, the tank 103 opens to an outside. That is, an inner space of the tank 103 is open to an atmosphere through the atmosphere communication port 124.
- the inner space of the tank 103 communicates with the inner space of the ink needle 102.
- ink flowing out from the ink cartridge 30 through the corresponding ink needle 102 is stored in the corresponding tank 103.
- Four ink tubes 20 are connected to the four tanks 103, respectively. The ink stored in the inner space of each tank 103 is thus supplied to the recording head 21 through the corresponding ink tube 20.
- the ink cartridge 30 is a container for storing liquid, such as ink, therein.
- liquid such as ink
- four ink cartridges 30 corresponding to respective four colors of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black can be attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- three ink cartridges 30 respectively corresponding to three colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow are identical in structure as illustrated in Fig. 4 .
- the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black differs in structure from the other three ink cartridges 30 in that the dimension in the left-right direction of the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black is greater than that of the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow.
- the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black is substantially identical to the other three ink cartridges 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow.
- the composition of the ink stored in the ink cartridge 30 is not particularly limited, but the ink may be pigment ink having a sedimentary component, for example. Alternatively, the ink may be dye ink.
- the structure of the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow will be described in detail.
- the configuration of the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black only parts differing from those of the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow will be described later as a variation of the ink cartridge 30.
- the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black will also be referred to as an ink cartridge 30K when it is necessary to distinguish between the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow and the ink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black.
- the posture of the ink cartridge 30 illustrated in Figs. 4 to 6 is a posture of the ink cartridge 30 when the ink cartridge 30 is in the operational posture, that is, a posture of the ink cartridge 30 in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is capable of being used in the printer 10.
- the posture of the ink cartridge 30 illustrated in Figs. 4 to 6 is also referred to as the "upright posture.”
- the ink cartridge 30 includes a front wall 40, 82, a rear wall 41, 83, a top wall 39, a bottom wall 42, 48, a right side wall 37, 84, and a left side wall 38, 85.
- the front wall 40, 82 faces frontward.
- the front wall 40 includes an inner curved surface 117A and an outer curved surface 117B opposite to the inner curved surface 117A, and an inner curved surface 118A and an outer curved surface 118B opposite to the inner curved surface 118A.
- the rear wall 41, 83 faces rearward.
- the top wall 39 faces upward.
- a front end of the top wall 39 is connected to an upper end of the front wall 82 and a rear end of the top wall 39 is connected to an upper end of the rear wall 83. That is, the top wall 39 extends in the front-rear direction between the front wall 40, 82 of the ink cartridge 30 and the rear wall 41, 83 of the ink cartridge 30.
- the bottom wall 42, 48 faces downward.
- the bottom wall 42, 48 extends in the front-rear direction between the front wall 40 and the rear wall 41.
- the bottom wall 42, 48 includes the main bottom wall portion 42 and a subordinate bottom wall portion 48.
- a connecting wall 49 connects the main bottom wall portion 42 to the subordinate bottom wall 48.
- the connecting wall 49 faces frontward.
- a front end of the bottom wall 42, 48 i.e. a front end of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48
- a rear end of the bottom wall 42, 48 i.e.
- the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 connects the lower end of the front wall 40 to an upper end of the connecting wall 49.
- the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 includes an inner curved surface 115A and an outer curved surface 115B opposite to the inner curved surface 115A, an inner curved surface 116A and an outer curved surface 116B opposite to the inner curved surface 116A, and an inner curved surface 119A and an outer curved surface 119B opposite to the inner curved surface 119A.
- the right side wall 37, 84 faces rightward.
- the left side wall 38, 85 faces leftward.
- a direction from the rear wall 41 toward the front wall 40 coincides with the frontward direction 51, and a direction from the front wall 40 toward the rear wall 41 coincides with the rearward direction 52.
- a direction from the top wall 39 toward the bottom wall 42, 48 coincides with the downward direction 53 (i.e., the gravitational direction), and a direction from the bottom wall 42, 48 toward the top wall 39 coincides with the upward direction 54.
- a direction from the left side wall 38 toward the right side wall 37 coincides with the rightward direction 55
- a direction from the right side wall 37 toward the left side wall 38 coincides with the leftward direction 56.
- the frontward direction 51, the rearward direction 52, and the front-rear direction coincide a longitudinal direction of the ink cartridge 30
- the downward direction 53, the upward direction 54, and the up-down direction coincide a heightwise direction of the ink cartridge 30
- the rightward direction 55, the leftward direction 56, and the left-right direction coincide a widthwise direction of the ink cartridge 30.
- an outer surface (i.e. front surface) of the front wall 40, 82 faces frontward
- an outer surface (i.e. rear surface) of the rear wall 41, 83 faces rearward
- an outer surface (i.e. bottom surface) of the bottom wall 42, 48 faces downward
- an outer surface (i.e. top surface) of the top wall 39 faces upward
- an outer surface (i.e. right surface) of the right side wall 37, 84 faces rightward
- an outer surface (i.e. left surface) of the left side wall 38, 85 faces leftward.
- the ink cartridge 30 has a generally flattened rectangular parallelepiped shape so that a dimension of the ink cartridge 30 in the left-right direction is small, and a dimension of the ink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction and a dimension of the ink cartridge 30 in the front-rear direction are greater than the dimension of the ink cartridge 30 in the left-right direction.
- the ink cartridge 30 includes the cartridge casing 130, a first inner lid 131, a second inner lid 132, a semipermeable membrane 141, a film 133, a film 146, an outer lid 134, a valve mechanism 135, a support member 150, and the ink supply portion 34.
- the cartridge casing 130 has a generally box-like shape opening upward. That is, the cartridge casing 130 has an opening 95 at its top end.
- the cartridge casing 130 is a container formed of resin.
- a first storage chamber 32 and a second storage chamber 33 are formed inside the cartridge casing 130.
- the cartridge casing 130 includes the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, the left side wall 38, the main bottom wall portion 42, the subordinate bottom wall portion 48, and the connecting wall 49.
- the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, the left side wall 38, the main bottom wall portion 42, the subordinate bottom wall 48, and the connecting wall 49 constitute outer walls of the cartridge casing 130.
- the rear wall 41 is spaced away from the front wall 40 in the front-rear direction.
- the left side wall 38 faces the right side wall 37 in the left-right direction.
- a gap distance between the front wall 40 and the rear wall 41 is greater than a gap distance between the right side wall 37 and the left side wall 38.
- the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, the left side wall 38, the subordinate bottom wall portion 48, and an inner bottom wall portion 45 ( Fig. 10 , described later) define a first storage chamber 32.
- the connecting wall 49 and the front wall 40 constitute the front wall of the cartridge casing 130.
- the front surface of the front wall 40 is a surface of the cartridge casing 130 facing frontward
- the rear surface of the rear wall 41 is a surface of the cartridge casing 130 facing rearward
- the front surface of the connecting wall 49 is also a surface of the cartridge casing 130 facing frontward.
- the right side wall 37 and the left side wall 38 respectively extend in a direction that crosses the front wall 40 and the rear wall 41.
- the right side wall 37 connects the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the main bottom wall portion 42, the subordinate bottom wall portion 48, and the connecting wall 49.
- the left side wall 38 connects the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the main bottom wall portion 42, the subordinate bottom wall portion 48, and the connecting wall 49.
- the outer surface of the right side wall 37 faces rightward while the outer surface of the left side wall 38 faces leftward.
- At least the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37 and the left side wall 38 are formed of a light transmissive material allowing visual recognition of the ink stored in the first storage chamber 32 and the second storage chamber 33 from an outside of the cartridge casing 130.
- at least the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37 and the left side wall 38 are made of resin, such as acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin, polypropylene, or the like, substantially without containing colorant.
- the color of the ink stored in the first storage chamber 32, the color of the ink stored in the second storage chamber 33, and the surface level of the ink stored in the first storage chamber 32 can be visually recognized.
- an upper surface 45A ( Fig. 10 ) of the inner bottom wall portion 45 (described later) can be visually recognized from an outside of the ink cartridge 30 through the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38.
- the main bottom wall portion 42 and the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 may also be formed of a light transmissive material.
- the cartridge casing 130 may be made of transparent or semi-transparent resin.
- two storage chambers that is, the first storage chamber 32 and the second storage chamber 33, constitute a liquid storage chamber of the ink cartridge 30.
- the ink cartridge 30 may have a liquid storage chamber constituted by one storage chamber. In this case, the inner bottom wall portion 45 may be dispensed with.
- the right side wall 37 and the left side wall 38 extend in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. As illustrated in Fig. 14 , the right side wall 37 slopes relative to the up-down direction so that its lower end is positioned further leftward than its upper end. Accordingly, an inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37 also slopes relative to the up-down direction so that its lower end is positioned further leftward than its upper end. The left side wall 38 slopes relative to the up-down direction so that its lower end is positioned further rightward than its upper end. Accordingly, an inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38 also slopes relative to the up-down direction so that its lower end is positioned further rightward than its upper end.
- a gap distance in the left-right direction between the inner surface 37A and the inner surface 38A is gradually decreased in the downward direction 53.
- a gap distance in the left-right direction between the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37 and the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38 at their lower ends is smaller than a gap distance in the left-right direction between the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37 and the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38 at their upper ends.
- the right side wall 37 and the left side wall 38 may not be sloped and extend in the up-down direction.
- the right side wall 37, the left side wall 38, the inner surface 37A, and the inner surface 38A need not slope relative to the up-down direction.
- the main bottom wall portion 42 slopes relative to the front-rear direction.
- a bottom surface of the main bottom wall portion 42 is a sloped surface that slopes relative to the front-rear direction so that its rear end is positioned further upward than its front end.
- the front end of the main bottom wall portion 42 is positioned frontward relative to the lock surface 151 (described later).
- the rear end of the main bottom wall portion 42 is connected to the lower end of the rear wall 41. That is, the main bottom wall portion 42 extends frontward from the lower end of the rear wall 41.
- the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 is positioned upward and frontward relative to the main bottom wall portion 42.
- each of the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37 and the left side wall 38 has an engagement claw 88 protruding outward from the cartridge casing 130.
- Each engagement claw 88 is engageable with an opening 86 formed in the outer lid 134.
- each of the engagement claws 88 is provided at each of the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38. That is, one engagement claw 88 is provided at each of the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38.
- more than one engagement claw 88 may be provided at each of the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38.
- the first inner lid 131 illustrated in Figs. 8A and 8B is adapted to close the opening 95 formed in the top end of the cartridge casing 130. As illustrated in Figs. 8A and 8B , the first inner lid 131 has a generally box-like shape, opening upward.
- the first inner lid 131 includes a bottom wall 136, a peripheral wall 137 upstanding from a peripheral edge of the bottom wall 136, and a flange wall 138 protruding outward from an outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 137.
- the bottom wall 136 has a through-hole 46 penetrating the thickness of the bottom wall 136 in the up-down direction. As illustrated in Fig. 10 , the through-hole 46 is formed at a position rearward relative to a front-rear center in an air chamber 36 of an air communication passage 72 (described later). An upper surface 136A of the bottom wall 136 slopes downward toward the through-hole 46.
- the through-hole 46 need not be formed at the position specified in Figs. 3 and 10 .
- the through-hole 46 may be formed at a position frontward relative to the front-rear center in the air chamber 36. Further, the upper surface 136A need not be sloped as described above.
- the first inner lid 131 is attached to the cartridge casing 130 through the opening 95 formed at the top end of the cartridge casing 130 from above and is disposed in an interior space of the cartridge casing 130.
- the first inner lid 131 is supported by the cartridge casing 130 in the interior space of the cartridge casing 130. More specifically, in a state where the first inner lid 131 is disposed in the interior space of the cartridge casing 130, a lower surface 138A of the flange wall 138 at a front end portion of the first inner lid 131 is supported by a stepped surface 40B of the front wall 40 of the cartridge casing 130.
- the stepped surface 40B is formed at an upper end portion of an inner surface (i.e. rear surface) of the front wall 40.
- a lower surface 138B of the flange wall 138 at a rear end portion of the first inner lid 131 is supported by a stepped surface 41B of the rear wall 41 of the cartridge casing 130.
- the stepped surface 41B is formed at an upper end portion of an inner surface (i.e. front surface) of the rear wall 41.
- the first inner lid 131 further includes two first ribs 185 and two second ribs 186.
- the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 are formed at a lower surface 136B of the bottom wall 136. In other words, two sets of the first rib 185 and the second ribs 186 are provided at the lower surface 136B.
- the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 serve as guides when attaching the first inner lid 131 to the cartridge casing 130. Further, the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 provide rigidity to the cartridge casing 130 when the first inner lid 131 is attached to the cartridge casing 130.
- the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 protrude downward from the lower surface 136B.
- the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 each have a protruding length from the lower surface 136B the same as one another.
- each of the two first ribs 185 and the two second ribs 186 has a lower end at a position the same as one another with respect to the up-down direction.
- the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 extend along the lower surface 136B.
- the two first ribs 185 are arranged spaced apart from each other in the front-rear direction.
- the two second ribs 186 are arranged spaced apart from each other in the front-rear direction.
- the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 are positioned frontward relative to the through-hole 46.
- Each of the first ribs 185 and corresponding one of the second ribs 186 are arranged opposite to each other and spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction.
- a gap formed between the first rib 185 and the corresponding second rib 186 can facilitate flow of ink when filling the ink cartridge 30 with the ink.
- Each of the first ribs 185 has an extending portion 185A and an inclining portion 185B.
- each of the second ribs 186 has an extending portion 186A and an inclining portion 186B.
- each first rib 185 is in contact with the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37 while the extending portion 186A of each second rib 186 is in contact with the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- Each extending portion 185A extends leftward from its base end that contacts the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37.
- Each extending portion 186A extends rightward from its base end that contacts the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- the inclining portion 185B extends from a distal end (i.e. left end) of the extending portion 185A and inclines relative to the front-rear direction so that a left end of the inclining portion 185B is positioned further rearward than a right end of the inclining portion 185B.
- the inclining portion 186B extends from a distal end (i.e. right end) of the extending portion 186A and inclines relative to the front-rear direction so that a right end of the inclining portion 186B is positioned further rearward than a left end of the inclining portion 186B.
- the inclining portion 185B extends toward the through-hole 46 from the extending portion 185A and inclines relative to the front-rear direction so that a distal end of the inclining portion 185B farthest from the extending portion 185A is positioned closer to the through-hole 46 in the left-right direction than a base end of the inclining portion 185B connected to the extending portion 185A to the through-hole 46.
- the inclining portion 186B extends toward the through-hole 46 from the extending portion 186A and inclines relative to the front-rear direction so that a distal end of the inclining portion 186B farthest from the extending portion 186A is positioned closer to the through-hole 46 in the left-right direction than a base end of the inclining portion 186B connected to the extending portion 186A.
- the distal end (i.e. rear end) of the inclining portion 185B of one of the first ribs 185 is positioned further rearward than the distal end (i.e. rear end) of the inclining portion 186B of corresponding one of the second ribs 186 that opposes the one of the first ribs 185 in the left-right direction.
- the distal end (i.e. rear end) of the inclining portion 185B of the other of the first ribs 185 is positioned further rearward than the distal end (i.e. rear end) of the inclining portion 186B of corresponding one of the second ribs 186 that opposes the other of the first ribs 185 in the left-right direction.
- the distal end of the inclining portion 185B of each first rib 185 is positioned closer to the through-hole 46 than the distal end of the inclining portion 186B of the corresponding second rib 186.
- neither the number of the first ribs 185 nor the number of the second ribs 186 is limited to two. Further, the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 may be formed rearward relative to the through-hole 46. Still further, the distal end of the inclining portion 186B of the second rib 186 may be positioned rearward relative to the distal end of the inclining portion 185B of the corresponding first rib 185.
- the second inner lid 132 has a plate-like shape.
- the second inner lid 132 is attached to the first inner lid 131 from above through a top opening of the first inner lid 131 and is disposed in an interior space of the first inner lid 131 defined by the bottom wall 136 and the peripheral wall 137.
- the second inner lid 132 is supported by the first inner lid 131 in the interior space of the first inner lid 131.
- a lower surface 132B of the second inner lid 132 is in contact with a stepped surface 137B (see Fig. 8B ) of the peripheral wall 137 of the first inner lid 131.
- the stepped surface 137B is formed at an inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 137 and faces upward. Accordingly, the lower surface 132B contacts the stepped surface 137B from above.
- the second inner lid 132 is provided with a rib 149 at its upper surface 132A.
- the rib 149 protrudes upward from a peripheral edge portion of the upper surface 132A.
- the second inner lid 132 is supported by the first inner lid 131, and the first inner lid 131 is supported by the cartridge casing 130.
- a top end face 149A of the rib 149 of the second inner lid 132, the top end face 137A of the peripheral wall 137 of the first inner lid 131, the top end face 130A of the cartridge casing 130 are positioned on the same imaginary plane that expands in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction.
- the second inner lid 132 has a through-hole 139.
- the through-hole 139 opposes the through-hole 46 of the first inner lid 131 in the up-down direction and is positioned above the through-hole 46.
- the through-hole 139 is positioned in alignment with the through-hole 46 with respect to the up-down direction.
- the second inner lid 132 further includes a rib 140 at the lower surface 132B.
- the rib 140 protrudes downward from the lower surface 132B.
- the rib 140 is positioned frontward relative to the through-hole 139.
- the rib 140 has a rectangular frame-like shape when the second inner lid 132 is viewed from a bottom side thereof.
- the shape of the rib 140 is not limited to a rectangular frame-like shape, provided that the rib 140 has an enclosed shape when the second inner lid 132 is viewed from a bottom side thereof.
- the rib 140 may have a circular shape when the second inner lid 132 is viewed from a bottom side thereof.
- the semipermeable membrane 141 (see Fig. 7 ) is welded or melt-bonded to a lower end surface of the rib 140.
- the semipermeable membrane 141 is a porous film having minute holes blocking the passage of ink but allowing the passage of air.
- the semipermeable membrane 141 is made of fluorine resin such as polytetrafluoro ethylene, polychlorotrifluoro ethylene, tetrafuloroethylene-hexafluoropropylene copolymer, tetrafuloroethylene-perfluoroalkyl vinyl ethyl copolymer, or tetrafluoroethylene-ethylene copolymer.
- the semipermeable membrane 141 is welded to the lower end surface of the rib 140, the rib 140, the lower surface 132B of the second inner lid 132, and the semipermeable membrane 141 define a space 89.
- the second inner lid 132 also has a through-hole 142.
- the through-hole 142 has one open end (i.e. lower open end) formed in the lower surface 132B at a position inside the rib 140 when the second inner lid 132 is viewed from a bottom side thereof.
- the through-hole 142 is formed in the second inner lid 132 such that the one open end of the through-hole 142 is positioned in a portion of the lower surface 132B providing the space 89. That is, the through-hole 142 is in communication with the space 89.
- the through-hole 142 and the semipermeable membrane 141 oppose each other in the up-down direction, with the space 89 interposed therebetween in the up-down direction.
- the through-hole 142 is formed at a position frontward relative to the front-rear center of the air chamber 36 of the air communication passage 72.
- the through-hole 142 is positioned at a right-front end portion in a region surrounded by the rib 140.
- the through-hole 142 need not be formed at the position specified in Fig. 9 .
- the through-hole 142 may be formed at a position rearward relative to the front-rear center of the air chamber 36.
- the through-hole 142 may be positioned at a left-front end portion or a rear end portion in the region surrounded by the rib 140.
- the second inner lid 132 also has a labyrinth path 143 at the upper surface 132A, as illustrated in Figs. 9B and 9C .
- the labyrinth path 143 is defined by the upper surface 132A, a plurality of ribs 144 provided at the upper surface 132A, and the film 146 (see Fig. 7 ) welded to upper end faces of the ribs 144.
- the plurality of ribs 144 extends in the front-rear direction and is juxtaposed with each other in the left-right direction.
- the labyrinth path 143 is a continuous passage that extends from the right to the left, repeatedly U-tuming in the front-rear direction.
- the labyrinth path 143 may not have the shape as illustrated in Fig. 9B .
- the labyrinth path 143 may be a continuous passage that extends in the front-rear direction, repeatedly U-turning in the left-right direction.
- the labyrinth path 143 has one end that is in communication with the through-hole 142 and the other end that is in communication with a communication hole 147.
- the communication hole 147 is a circular hole that opens upward.
- the communication hole 147 is defined by the upper surface 132A and a rib 148.
- the rib 148 has a hollow cylindrical shape and protrudes upward from the upper surface 132A.
- the rib 148 is connected to the ribs 144. Hence, the rib 148 is connected to the labyrinth path 143. In other words, the communication hole 147 is in communication with the labyrinth path 143.
- the film 133 and the film 146 are formed of a material that is impermeable to liquid and air. Neither the film 146 nor the film 133 (see Fig. 7 ) is welded to an upper end face of the rib 148.
- the communication hole 147 thus opens upward and in communication with the atmosphere.
- the communication hole 147 constitutes an end of the air communication passage 72.
- the communication hole 147 has an area when the communication hole 147 is viewed from above. This area of the communication hole 147 is greater than a cross-sectional area of the labyrinth path 143 taken along a plane perpendicular to an air flowing direction, that is, a cross-sectional area of the labyrinth path 143 taken along a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction illustrated in Fig. 9C .
- the area of the communication hole 147 is in a range from 3.1 square millimeters to 23.7 square millimeters while the cross-sectional arear of the labyrinth path 143 is in a range from 0.8 square millimeters to 1.0 square millimeter, for example.
- the communication hole 147 is not limited to a circular hole. Further, the communication hole 147 may face in any directions other than the upward direction 54.
- the second inner lid 132 has a rib 156, a pair of ribs 157, and a pair of ribs 158 at the upper surface 132A around the through-hole 139.
- the rib 156 protrudes from the upper surface 132A along a peripheral edge of the through-hole 139.
- the rib 156 has a hollow cylindrical shape.
- the rib 156 is adapted to fix the position of a rod 165 of a valve body 161 of the valve mechanism 135 (see Figs. 7 and 10 ) inserted into the through-hole 139 with respect to the left-right direction and the front-rear direction.
- the pair of ribs 157 is provided so that the rib 156 is interposed between the ribs 157 in the front-rear direction.
- Each rib 157 is U-shaped, with an opening of the "U" shape facing the rib 156 when viewed from above.
- the ribs 157 are adapted to fix the position of the rod 165 of the valve body 161 of the valve mechanism 135 (see Fig. 7 ) with respect to the left-right direction and the front-rear direction.
- the pair of ribs 158 is provided so that the rib 156 and the ribs 157 are interposed between the ribs 158 in the front-rear direction.
- Each rib 158 is bent at its distal end. The bent portion of each rib 158 at the distal end is capable of engaging with an engagement portion 152 of the support member 150 (see Fig. 10 ).
- the film 133 has a rectangular shape. As illustrated in Fig. 10 , the film 133 is welded to the top end face 130A of the cartridge casing 130, the top end face 137A of the peripheral wall 137 of the first inner lid 131, and the top end face 149A of the rib 149 of the second inner lid 132.
- the film 133 does not necessarily have a rectangular shape.
- the film 133 may have any shape other than a rectangular shape provided that the film 133 can be welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and the top end face 149A as described above.
- the film 133 has an opening 159 and an opening 160.
- the opening 159 is formed at a position corresponding to the rib 144 in a state where the film 133 is welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and the top end face 149A.
- the film 146 welded to the rib 144 is exposed to an outside through the opening 159 in a state where the film 133 is welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and the top end face 149A.
- the opening 160 is formed at a position corresponding to the rib 156, the ribs 157, the ribs 158 and the valve mechanism 135 in a state where the film 133 is welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and the top end face 149A.
- the rib 156, the ribs 157, the ribs 158, and the valve mechanism 135 are exposed to an outside through the opening 160 in a state where the film 133 is welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and the top end face 149A.
- the outer lid 134 has a generally box-like shape opening downward.
- the outer lid 134 includes the top wall 39, the front wall 82, the rear wall 83, the right side wall 84, and the left side wall 85.
- the front wall 82 extends downward from the front end of the top wall 39.
- the front wall 82 has a lower end connected to the front wall 40 of the cartridge casing 130.
- the front wall 82 of the outer lid 134 and the front wall 40 and the connecting wall 49 of the cartridge casing 130 constitute the front wall of the ink cartridge 30.
- the rear wall 83 extends downward from the rear end of the top wall 39.
- the rear wall 83 has a lower end connected to the rear wall 41 of the cartridge casing 130.
- the rear wall 83 of the outer lid 134 and the rear wall 41 of the cartridge casing 130 constitute the rear wall of the ink cartridge 30.
- the right side wall 84 extends downward from a right end of the top wall 39 and connects the front wall 82 to the rear wall 83.
- the right side wall 84 has a lower end connected to the right side wall 37 of the cartridge casing 130.
- the right side wall 84 of the outer lid 134 and the right side wall 37 of the cartridge casing 130 constitute the right side wall of the ink cartridge 30.
- the left side wall 85 extends downward from a left end of the top wall 39 and connects the front wall 82 to the rear wall 83.
- the left side wall 85 has a lower end connected to the left side wall 38 of the cartridge casing 130.
- the left side wall 85 of the outer lid 134 and the left side wall 38 of the cartridge casing 130 constitute the left side wall of the ink cartridge 30.
- Each of the front wall 82, the rear wall 83, the right side wall 84 and the left side wall 85 has the opening 86.
- the engagement claws 88 of the cartridge casing 130 can engage with the openings 86, respectively.
- the outer lid 134 covers the cartridge casing 130 from above.
- the openings 86 are formed in the outer lid 134 while the engagement claws 88 are provided at the cartridge casing 130.
- the engagement claws 88 may be provided at the outer lid 134 while the openings 86 may be formed in the cartridge casing 130.
- the top wall 39 has an opening 44 that extends in the front-rear direction.
- the opening 44 is formed at a position upward of the rib 156, the ribs 157 and the ribs 158 of the second inner lid 132.
- the outer lid 134 includes the protruding portion 43 that protrudes upward from the top wall 39.
- the protruding portion 43 is provided on the top wall 39 so as to surround the opening 44 from right, left and rear sides thereof.
- the lock shaft 145 ( Fig. 3 ) can access the protruding portion 43 from an outside.
- the protruding portion 43 has a rear end whose rear surface faces rearward.
- the rear surface of the protruding portion 43 serves as the lock surface 151.
- the lock surface 151 is positioned upward relative to the top surface of the top wall 39.
- the lock surface 151 extends in the up-down direction and in the left-right direction.
- the lock surface 151 facing rearward is in contact with the lock shaft 145. Since the lock surface 151 facing rearward abuts on the lock shaft 145, the ink cartridge 30 is held in the cartridge attachment section 110 against the urging force of the coil spring 78.
- Accessed components or members, such as the protruding portion 43 can be accessed from the outside of the ink cartridge 30 in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the protruding portion 43 includes the pair of walls 114.
- the pair of walls 114 is positioned frontward of the lock surface 151, with the opening 44 interposed therebetween.
- Each of the walls 114 has an upper end surface including a horizontal surface 154 and a sloped surface 155.
- the horizontal surface 154 has a rear end continuous to the lock surface 151.
- the sloped surface 155 is positioned frontward relative to the horizontal surface 154.
- the sloped surface 155 is continuous to a front end of the horizontal surface 154.
- the sloped surface 155 faces upward and frontward.
- the sloped surface 155 slopes so that its front end is positioned further downward than its rear end.
- the lock shaft 145 is smoothly guided by the sloped surface 155 and the horizontal surface 154 toward a position further rearward than the lock surface 151 while contacting the sloped surface 155 and the horizontal surface 154.
- the outer lid 134 further includes an operation portion 90.
- the operation portion 90 is provided on the top wall 39 at a position rearward relative to the lock surface 151.
- the operation portion 90 may be manipulated by a user.
- the top wall 39 has a subordinate upper surface 91 at its rear end portion.
- the operation portion 90 is disposed above the subordinate upper surface 91 and spaced apart from the subordinate upper surface 91.
- the operation portion 90 has a generally flat plate-like shape. Specifically, the operation portion 90 protrudes upward from a boundary region between the subordinate upper surface 91 and a remaining upper surface of the top wall 39 to a height the same as the protruding portion 43.
- An upper end of the operation portion 90 is positioned further frontward than a lower end of the operation portion 90.
- a rib 94 is provided between the operation portion 90 and the subordinate upper surface 91.
- the rib 94 connects the operation portion 90 to the subordinate upper surface 91.
- the rib 94 extends rearward from the boundary region between the subordinate upper surface 91 and the remaining upper surface.
- the rib 94 has a dimension in the left-right direction smaller than a dimension in the left-right direction of the operation portion 90 and also smaller than a dimension in the left-right direction of the subordinate upper surface 91.
- the rib 94 can suppress deformation of a rear portion of the operation portion 90 in the up-down direction.
- the operation portion 90 has a surface facing upward and rearward. This surface serves as an operation surface 92.
- a rear portion of the operation surface 92 and the subordinate upper surface 91 are positioned so as to overlap with each other in the front-rear direction. In other words, when the ink cartridge 30 is viewed from above, the rear portion of the operation surface 92 overlaps with the subordinate upper surface 91.
- On the operation surface 92 a plurality of projections, e.g., a plurality of projecting ribs 93, extending in the left-right direction is formed.
- the projecting ribs 93 are spaced apart from one another in the front-rear direction.
- the projecting ribs 93 as a plurality of projections allow the user to physically recognize the operation surface 92.
- the projecting ribs 93 can also serve to prevent the user's finger from slipping over the operation surface 92 when the user manipulates the operation surface 92.
- the accessed components or members can be accessed from the outside of the ink cartridge 30 in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the accessed components may be components to be accessed by the user for manipulating the same in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the operation surface 92 can be visually recognized when the ink cartridge 30 is viewed from an upper side thereof.
- the operation surface 92 can also be visually recognized when the ink cartridge 30 is viewed from a rear side thereof.
- the user manipulates the operation surface 92 in order to remove the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 therefrom.
- the operation portion 90 is formed integrally with the outer lid 134.
- the operation portion 90 is fixed to the outer lid 134 and immovable relative to the outer lid 134.
- the operation portion 90 does not pivotally move relative to the outer lid 134. Therefore, a force applied from the user to the operation surface 92 is directly transmitted to the outer lid 134 without changing a direction of the force.
- each of the front wall 40, 82, the rear wall 41, 83, the top wall 39, the bottom wall 42, 48, the right side wall 37, 84, and the left side wall 38, 85 constituting the ink cartridge 30 need not be configured as one flat surface. That is, the front surface (i.e. the outer surface of the front wall) of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when the ink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from its front side and that is positioned frontward relative to a front-rear center of the ink cartridge 30 in its operational state. Accordingly, a front surface of the connecting wall 49 may constitute a part of the front surface of the front wall of the ink cartridge 30.
- the rear surface i.e.
- the outer surface of the rear wall) of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when the ink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from its rear side and that is positioned rearward relative to the front-rear center of the ink cartridge 30.
- the top surface (i.e. the outer surface of the top wall) of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when the ink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from above and that is positioned upward relative to an up-down (vertical) center of the ink cartridge 30.
- the bottom surface i.e.
- the outer surface of the bottom wall) of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when the ink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from below and that is positioned downward relative to the up-down center of the ink cartridge 30. The same is applied to the right surface (i.e. the outer surface of the right side wall) of the ink cartridge 30 and the left surface (i.e. the outer surface of the left side wall) of the ink cartridge 30.
- the right surface of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when the ink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from its right side and that is positioned rightward relative to a left-right center of the ink cartridge 30.
- the left surface of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when the ink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from its left side and that is positioned leftward relative to the left-right center of the ink cartridge 30.
- the outer lid 134 further includes a light-blocking plate 67.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is provided on the top surface (outer surface) of the top wall 39.
- the light-blocking plate 67 protrudes upward from the top surface of the top wall 39.
- the light-blocking plate 67 has a flat plate-like shape that extends in the front-rear direction.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is integral with the top wall 39.
- the light-blocking plate 67 may not be integral with the top wall 39.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is positioned frontward relative to the protruding portion 43.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is also positioned frontward relative to the IC board 64 (described later).
- the light-blocking plate 67 is a resin plate containing a colored material capable of absorbing light (such as, black pigment, carbon black pigment, or black dye).
- the light-blocking plate 67 may be configured by attaching a material that cannot transmit light, such as aluminum, to side surfaces of a plate capable of transmitting light.
- the light-blocking plate 67 has a cutout 66 as illustrated in Fig. 6 .
- the cutout 66 is recessed downward from an upper edge 67C of the light-blocking plate 67 and extends in the front-rear direction.
- the cutout 66 is formed in the light-blocking plate 67 at a position in alignment with the optical sensor 113 in the left-right direction when the ink cartridge 30 is completely attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the light-blocking plate 67 has left and right surfaces serving as a light-blocking surface 67A. Light emitted from an outside of the ink cartridge 30 and travelling in the left-right direction can access the light-blocking surface 67A.
- the light-blocking surface 67A includes a light-blocking portion 68 adapted to block light emitted from the optical sensor 113 and travelling in the left-right direction (see Figs. 2 and 6 ) during the attachment and removal process of the ink cartridge 30 relative to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the light-blocking portion 68 is configured to either prevent a light from passing therethrough or to alter a path of the light when the light-blocking portion 68 receives the light.
- the light-blocking portion 68 is provided at a region of the light-blocking surface 67A from a front edge 67B of the light-blocking plate 67 to a front edge of the cutout 66.
- the light emitted from the light emitter of the optical sensor 113 is incident on the light-blocking portion 68 before the light arrives at the light receiver of the optical sensors 113.
- the intensity of light received at the light receiver is less than a predetermined intensity, for example, zero.
- the light-blocking portion 68 may completely block the light traveling in the left-right direction, or may partially attenuate the light. Alternatively, the light-blocking portion 68 may refract the light to change a traveling direction thereof, or may fully reflect the light.
- to block light herein implies that the light emitted from the light emitter is prevented from reaching the light receiver in an amount that the light receiver can detect the light-blocking plate 67.
- the light-blocking plate 67 may not be formed with the cutout 66. Depending on types of the ink cartridge 30, the light-blocking plate 67 may or may not have the cutout 66. In other words, depending on types of the ink cartridge 30, the light-blocking plate 67 may or may not be detected through the optical sensor 113 in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the types of the ink cartridge 30 imply that colors of ink stored in the ink cartridge 30, types of ink (pigment ink or dye ink) stored in the ink cartridge 30 and initial amounts of ink (large amount or small amount) stored in the ink cartridge 30, for example.
- a light-blocking plate 267 has a flat plate-like shape that extends in the front-rear direction. No cutout is formed in the light-blocking plate 267.
- the light-blocking plate 267 has a configuration the same as that of the light-blocking plate 67 except that the cutout 66 is not formed.
- the light-blocking plate 267 has a light-blocking surface 267A including a light-blocking portion 268.
- the light blocking portion 268 is provided in a region of the light-blocking surface 267A from a front edge 267B of the light-blocking plate 267 to a position where the optical sensor 113 opposes when the ink cartridge 30 is completely attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the light emitted from the light emitter of the optical sensor 113 is blocked, attenuated, refracted, or reflected by the light-blocking portion 268.
- the light-blocking portion 268 has a portion 268A opposing the optical sensor 113 in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110, the light emitted from the light emitter of the optical sensor 113 is blocked, attenuated, refracted, or reflected by the light-blocking portion 268 when the ink cartridge 30 is completely attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the printer 10 can determine, for example, whether the ink cartridge 30 has been attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 based on the intensity of the light received by the light receiver of the optical sensor 113 during the attachment and removal process of the ink cartridge 30 relative to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the printer 10 may determine whether the ink cartridge 30 has been attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 based on whether or not the light emitted from the light emitter of the optical sensor 113 is blocked by the light-blocking plate 267, that is, the light-blocking plate 267 is detected, when the ink cartridge 30 has been attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the printer 10 can determine the type of the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 based on the presence or absence of the cutout 66, that is, based on whether the light emitted from the light emitter of the optical sensor 113 passes through the cutout 66 to be received by the light receiver of the optical sensors 113. The user also may visually determine the type of the ink cartridge 30 based on the presence or absence of the cutout 66. Further, the printer 10 may determine the information on the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 based on change of detection signals outputted from the optical sensor 113 during the attachment process of the ink cartridge 30 to the cartridge attachment section 110 and when the ink cartridge 30 has been attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the IC board 64 is disposed at the top surface of the top wall 39.
- the IC board 64 is positioned between the light-blocking plate 67 and the protruding portion 43 in the front-rear direction.
- the IC board 64 is positioned closer to the ink supply portion 34 than the protruding portion 43 is to the ink supply portion 34 in the front-rear direction.
- the light-blocking plate 67, the IC board 64, and the protruding portion 43 are arranged in this order from the front side to the rear side of the top wall 39.
- the light-blocking surface 67A of the light-blocking plate 67, upper surfaces of the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64, and the lock surface 151 of the protruding portion 43 are arranged in this order from the front side to the rear side of the top wall 39.
- the IC board 64 is electrically connected to the four contacts 106 during the insertion process of the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge attachment section 110. In a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110, electrical connection between the IC board 64 and the four contacts 106 are maintained.
- the IC board 64 includes a substrate, an IC (not illustrated), and the four electrodes 65.
- the substrate supports the IC.
- the four electrodes 65 are mounted on the substrate.
- the four electrodes 65 are electrically connected to the IC.
- the four electrodes 65 extend in the front-rear direction and are arrayed in the left-right direction.
- the four electrodes 65 are disposed on an upper surface of the substrate and exposed to an outside to allow electrical access thereto from above.
- the upper surfaces of the four electrodes 65 can directly contact the four contacts 106 of the case 101, respectively when the ink cartridge 30 has been attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the IC is a semiconductor integrated circuit.
- the IC readably stores data indicative of information on the ink cartridge 30, such as a lot number, a manufacturing date, a color of the ink, the number of printable sheets of paper, and the like.
- the substrate may be a rigid substrate or a flexible substrate having flexibility.
- the ink cartridge 30 includes the first storage chamber 32, the second storage chamber 33, an ink valve chamber 35, and the air communication passage 72.
- the first storage chamber 32, the second storage chamber 33, the ink valve chamber 35, and the air communication passage 72 are provided inside the ink cartridge 30.
- the inner bottom wall portion 45 is provided inside the ink cartridge 30. More specifically, the cartridge casing 130 has the inner bottom wall portion 45.
- the inner bottom wall portion 45 extends in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. In a state where the cartridge casing 130 supports the first inner lid 131, the inner bottom wall portion 45 opposes the bottom wall 136 of the first inner lid 131 in the up-down direction.
- the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45 is continuous with the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48.
- An upper end of the first storage chamber 32 is defined by the lower surface 136B of the bottom wall 136 of the first inner lid 131.
- a lower end of the first storage chamber 32 is defined by the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45 and an upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48.
- a front end of the first storage chamber 32 is defined by an inner surface 40A of the front wall 40.
- a rear end of the first storage chamber 32 is defined by an inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41.
- a left end of the first storage chamber 32 is defined by the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- a right end of the first storage chamber 32 is defined by the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37.
- the first storage chamber 32 is a space defined by the lower surface 136B of the bottom wall 136 of the first inner lid 131, the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45, the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48, the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40, the inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41, the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, and the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- a dimension in the front-rear direction of the first storage chamber 32 is greater than a dimension in the left-right direction of the first storage chamber 32. Gaps between the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37 and the left side wall 38, and the first inner lid 131 are sealed liquid-tightly with the film 133.
- the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 protrude into the first storage chamber 32 from the lower surface 136B of the bottom wall 136 of the first inner lid 131.
- the lower surface 136B is one of the surfaces defining the first storage chamber 32.
- the ribs 185, 186 protrude from the lower surface 136B. However, no ribs protrude from the surfaces defining the first storage chamber 32 other than the lower surface 136B. That is, none of the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45, the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48, the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40, the inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41, the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, and the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38 has an inwardly protruding portion, such as a rib, protruding or extending therefrom toward the first storage chamber 32.
- no inwardly protruding portion should be formed on the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45, the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48, the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40, the inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41, the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, and the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- inwardly protruding portions may be formed on these surfaces.
- the ink stored in the first storage chamber 32 is in contact with the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45, the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48, the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40, the inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41, the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, and the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- the through-hole 46 is formed in the bottom wall 136 of the first inner lid 131. Through the through-hole 46, the first storage chamber 32 is in communication with the air chamber 36 of the air communication passage 72.
- the second storage chamber 33 is provided in the interior space of the cartridge casing 130 at a position downward relative to the first storage chamber 32 when the ink cartridge 30 is in its operational posture.
- the second storage chamber 33 is adapted to store ink therein.
- the second storage chamber 33 has a volume smaller than that of the first storage chamber 32. Thus, a smaller amount of ink can be stored in the second storage chamber 33 than in the first storage chamber 32.
- An upper end of the second storage chamber 33 is defined by a lower surface 45B of the inner bottom wall portion 45.
- a lower end of the second storage chamber 33 is defined by an upper surface 42A of the main bottom wall portion 42.
- a rear end of the second storage chamber 33 is defined by the inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41.
- a left end of the second storage chamber 33 is defined by the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38 while a right end of the second storage chamber 33 is defined by the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37.
- the second storage chamber 33 and the ink valve chamber 35 are partitioned by a partitioning wall 50.
- a front end of the second storage chamber 33 is defined by a surface 50A of the partitioning wall 50.
- the surface 50A is a rear surface of the partitioning wall 50 and is closer to the second storage chamber 33 than to a front surface of the partitioning wall 50.
- the second storage chamber 33 is a space defined by the lower surface 45B of the inner bottom wall portion 45, the upper surface 42A of the main bottom wall portion 42, the inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41, the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38, and the surface 50A of the partitioning wall 50.
- the ink stored in the second storage chamber 33 is in contact with the lower surface 45B of the inner bottom wall portion 45, the upper surface 42A of the main bottom wall portion 42, the inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41, the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38, and the surface 50A of the partitioning wall 50.
- the second storage chamber 33 is in communication with the first storage chamber 32 through a communication hole 47 ( Figs. 10 and 11 ) formed in the inner bottom wall portion 45.
- the communication hole 47 is formed at a rear-right end portion of the inner bottom wall portion 45. In other words, an open end of the communication hole 47 is open to the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45.
- the second storage chamber 33 is also in communication with the ink valve chamber 35 through a through-hole 99 formed in the partitioning wall 50.
- the ink valve chamber 35 extends from the second storage chamber 33 in the frontward direction 51.
- the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45 and the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 are sloped.
- the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45 and the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 slope relative to the front-rear direction so that a front end of the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 is positioned further upward than a rear end of the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45. That is, the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45 and the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 slope downward toward the communication hole 47.
- the communication hole 47 need not be formed in the rear-right end portion of the inner bottom wall portion 45.
- the communication hole 47 may be formed in a front-rear center portion of the inner bottom wall portion 45, for example.
- the communication hole 47 may be formed in the inner bottom wall portion 45 across an entire region in the left-right direction, or may be formed in the subordinate bottom wall portion 48.
- the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45 slopes relative to the front-rear direction, that is, slopes downward toward the communication hole 47.
- the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45 need not slope as described above.
- the upper surface 48A includes the curved surface 115A, the curved surface 116A, and the curved surface 119A.
- the curved surface 115A extends downward from the lower end of the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37. That is, the curved surface 115A is continuously connected to the lower end of the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37.
- the curved surface 116A extends downward from the lower end of the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38. That is, the curved surface 116A is continuously connected to the lower end of the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- the curved surface 115A and the curved surface 116A are provided by the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48.
- the upper surface 45A includes a curved region continuously connected to the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, and another curved region continuously connected to the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- Each of the curved surface 115A and the curved surface 116A has a radius of curvature that is greater than that of the curved regions of the upper surface 45A.
- the curved surface 115A is curved so that its lower end is positioned further leftward than its upper end.
- the curved surface 116A is curved so that its lower end is positioned further rightward than its upper end.
- the curved surface 115A and the curved surface 116A are curved so as to expand outward of the cartridge casing 130.
- the lower end of the curved surface 115A is connected to the lower end of the curved surface 116A.
- the lower end of the curved surface 115A and the lower end of the curved surface 116A provide a lowermost portion of the first storage chamber 32 at its front portion, that is, a lowermost portion of the upper surface 48A.
- the lower end of the curved surface 115A is connected to the lower end of the curved surface 116A (i.e. the lowermost portion of the upper surface 48A as well as the lowermost portion of the first storage chamber 32 at its front portion), and the lower end of the curved surface 116A is connected to the lower end of the curved surface 115A (i.e.
- a curved inner surface having a U-shaped cross-section is formed by the upper surface 48A, and the U-shaped curved inner surface (i.e. the upper surface 48A) connects the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37 to the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- the outer curved surface 115B of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 is curved in a direction substantially parallel to a direction that the inner curved surface 115A is curved.
- the outer curved surface 115B is curved in a direction the same as a direction that the inner curved surface 115A is curved.
- the outer curved surface 116B of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 is curved in a direction substantially parallel to a direction that the inner curved surface 116A is curved.
- the outer curved surface 116B is curved in a direction the same as the inner curved surface 116A is curved.
- the outer curved surfaces 115B and 116B need not be curved.
- the outer curved surfaces 115B and 116B may be bent.
- the curved surface 119A extends downward from the lower end of the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40. That is, the curved surface 119A is continuously connected to the lower end of the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40.
- the curved surface 119A is provided by the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48.
- the curved surface 119A is curved so that its lower end is positioned further rearward than its upper end.
- the curved surface 119A is curved so as to expand outward of the cartridge casing 130.
- the outer curved surface 119B of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 is curved in a direction substantially parallel to a direction that the inner curved surface 119A is curved.
- the outer curved surface 119B is curved in a direction the same as a direction that the inner curved surface 119A is curved.
- the outer curved surface 119B need not be curved.
- the outer curved surface 119B may be bent.
- the inner surface 40A includes the curved surface 117A, the curved surface 118A, and an intermediate surface 121A between the curved surface 117A and the curved surface 118A.
- the curved surface 117A extends frontward from the front end of the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37. That is, the curved surface 117A is continuously connected to the front end of the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37.
- the curved surface 118A extends frontward from the front end of the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38. That is, the curved surface 118A is continuously connected to the front end of the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- the curved surface 117A has a front end continuously connected to a right end of the intermediate surface 121A of the inner surface 40A.
- the curved surface 118A has a front end continuously connected to a left end of the intermediate surface 121A of the inner surface 40A.
- the curved surface 117A and the curved surface 118A are provided by the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40.
- the curved surface 117A is curved so that its front end is positioned further leftward than its rear end.
- the curved surface 118A is curved so that its front end is positioned further rightward than its rear end.
- the curved surface 117A and the curved surface 118A are curved so as to expand outward of the cartridge casing 130.
- the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40 has a left-right center portion that constitutes a frontmost portion of the first storage chamber 32. That is, the intermediate surface 121A includes the frontmost portion of the first storage chamber 32. The front end of the curved surface 117A and the front end of the curved surface 118A are connected to the intermediate surface 121A that includes the frontmost portion of the first storage chamber 32.
- the outer curved surface 117B of the front wall 40 is curved in a direction substantially parallel to a direction that the inner curved surface 117A is curved. In other words, the outer curved surface 117B is curved in a direction the same as a direction that the inner curved surface 117A is curved.
- the outer curved surface 118B of the front wall 40 is curved substantially parallel to a direction that the inner curved surface 118A is curved. In other words, the outer curved surface 118B is curved in a direction the same as a direction that the inner curved surface 118A is curved.
- the outer curved surfaces 117B and 118B need not be curved. For example, the outer curved surfaces 117B and 118B may be bent.
- the inner curved surface 115A, the inner curved surface 117A, and the inner curved surface 119A are smoothly and continuously connected to each other to provide a boundary region formed with a substantially spherical surface.
- the inner curved surface 116A, the inner curved surface 118A, and the inner curved surface 119A are smoothly and continuously connected to each other to provide a boundary region formed with a substantially spherical surface.
- the outer curved surface 115B, the outer curved surface 117B, and the outer curved surface 119B are smoothly and continuously connected to each other to provide a boundary region formed with a spherical surface.
- outer curved surface 116B, the outer curved surface 118B, and the outer curved surface 119B are smoothly and continuously connected to each other to provide a boundary region formed with a substantially spherical surface.
- the spherical surface of the boundary region between the outer curved surface 116B, the outer curved surface 118B, and the outer curved surface 119B is designated by a reference sign 200.
- the curved surface 115A and the curved surface 116A are continuously connected to each other at their lower ends.
- the lower end of the curved surface 115A and the lower end of the curved surface 116A may not be continuously connected to each other.
- the front end of the curved surface 117A and the front end of the curved surface 118A are connected to the intermediate surface 121A.
- the front end of the curved surface 117A and the front end of the curved surface 118A may be continuously connected to each other.
- the connecting portion between the curved surface 117A and the curved surface 118A constitutes the frontmost portion of the first storage chamber 32.
- the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 includes the curved surface 115A connected to the lower end of the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, the curved surface 116A connected to the lower end of the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38, and the curved surface 119A connected to the lower end of the front surface 40A of the front wall 40.
- the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40 includes the curved surface 117A connected to the front end of the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, and the curved surface 118A connected to the front end of the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- an inner curved surface(s) may be provided so as to be connected to the rear end of the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, the rear end of the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38, the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40, the inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41, the upper surface 42A of the main bottom wall portion 42, the upper surface 45A of the inner bottom wall portion 45, and the upper surface 48A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48.
- the upper surface 45A may include a curved surface 122A continuously connected to the inner surface 41A of the rear wall 41.
- a curved surface may extend from one end of an inner surface of at least one of the right side wall 37, the left side wall 38, the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the main bottom wall portion 42, the subordinate bottom wall portion 48, and the inner bottom wall portion 45.
- the inner curved surface 115A and the inner curved surface 116A each have a radius of curvature of, for example, not less than 1 mm. More specifically, the inner curved surface 115A and the inner curved surface 116A each have a radius of the curvature in a range from 1 mm to 3 mm.
- the outer curved surface 115B and the outer curved surface 116B each have a radius of curvature of, for example, not less than 7 mm.
- the air communication passage 72 is a space that provides communication between the first storage chamber 32 and an exterior of the ink cartridge 30.
- the air communication passage 72 is positioned above the cartridge casing 130. As illustrated in Fig. 10 , the air communication passage 72 includes the air chamber 36, the through-hole 142 (see Figs. 9A and 9B ), and the labyrinth path 143 described above.
- the air chamber 36 is a space formed in the air communication passage 72.
- the air chamber 36 communicates with the first storage chamber 32 at one end and communicates with the labyrinth path 143 at the other end.
- the air chamber 36 has a portion positioned above the first storage chamber 32 and below the labyrinth path 143.
- the air chamber 36 has a lower end defined by the upper surface 136A of the bottom wall 136 of the first inner lid 131 and an upper end defined by the lower surface 132B of the second inner lid 132.
- the air chamber 36 has a front end, a rear end, a right end, and a left end defined by the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 137 (see Figs. 8A and 8B ) of the first inner lid 131.
- a gap between the second inner lid 132 and the peripheral wall 137 of the first inner lid 131 is sealed liquid-tightly with the film 133.
- the upper end of the first storage chamber 32 is defined by the lower surface 136B of the bottom wall 136 of the first inner lid 131. That is, the first storage chamber 32 and the air chamber 36 are partitioned by the bottom wall 136.
- the air chamber 36 is in communication with the first storage chamber 32 through the through-hole 46 penetrating the bottom wall 136 in the up-down direction. Further, the air chamber 36 is in communication with the labyrinth path 143 through the through-hole 142 (see Figs. 9A and 9B ) formed in the second inner lid 132. As described above, the semipermeable membrane 141 (see Fig. 7 ) is welded to the lower end surface of the rib 140 of the second inner lid 132. With this structure, ink flowing from the first storage chamber 32 through the through-hole 46 is blocked by the semipermeable membrane 141 and does not reach the through-hole 142. Hence, the semipermeable membrane 141 prevents ink from flowing into the labyrinth path 143.
- the labyrinth path 143 is defined by the upper surface 132A, the plurality of ribs 144 (see Fig. 9B ), and the film 146 (see Fig. 7 ).
- the labyrinth path 143 is a continuous passage that extends in the left-right direction, repeatedly U-tuming in the front-rear direction.
- the labyrinth path 143 is provided in a form of a groove covered with the film 146 at its top end.
- the labyrinth path 143 has one end in communication with the through-hole 142 and another end in communication with the communication hole 147.
- the labyrinth path 143 is in communication with the air chamber 36 through the through-hole 142 formed in the second inner lid 132.
- the labyrinth path 143 is provided at a surface (i.e. upper surface 132A) of the second inner lid 132, the surface being opposite to a surface (i.e. lower surface 132B) of the second inner lid 132 that defines the upper end of the air chamber 36.
- the surface defining the upper end of the air chamber 36 is an inner surface of the second inner lid 132.
- the labyrinth path 143 is positioned upward relative to the air chamber 36.
- the labyrinth path 143 is in communication with an interior space 134A (see Fig. 10 ) of the outer lid 134 through the communication hole 147 (see Fig. 7 ).
- the interior space 134A is in communication with the outside of the ink cartridge 30 through the opening 44 (see Fig. 4 ) formed in the top wall 39 of the outer lid 134 and through a gap between the outer lid 134 and the cartridge casing 130. That is, the labyrinth path 143 can communicates with the atmosphere through the communication hole 147.
- the valve mechanism 135 has a function for interrupting and establishing communication between the first storage chamber 32 and the atmosphere.
- the configuration of the valve mechanism 135 according to the embodiment will be described in detail below.
- the valve mechanism 135 may have a different configuration, provided that the valve mechanism 135 can perform the function for interrupting and establishing communication between the first storage chamber 32 and the atmosphere.
- the valve mechanism 135 may be so configured that the valve body 161 (described later) is movable in a direction other than the up-down direction.
- the valve mechanism 135 includes the valve body 161, a coil spring 162, and the lever 163.
- the valve body 161 includes the rod 165 and a seal member 166 fitted onto the rod 165.
- the seal member 166 and a part of the rod 165 are disposed in the air communication passage 72.
- the coil spring 162 and the remaining part of the rod 165 are disposed in the interior space 134A of the outer lid 134.
- the arrangement of the components in the valve mechanism 135 is not limited to the above. For example, all the components of the valve mechanism 135 may be disposed in the air communication passage 72.
- the support member 150 illustrated in Fig. 7 is adapted to pivotally movably support the valve mechanism 135, more specifically, the lever 163 (described later) of the valve mechanism 135.
- the support member 150 has an internal space in which a part of the valve mechanism 135 can be disposed.
- the support member 150 includes two engagement portions 152, with one at a front end and the other at a rear end. Upon engagement of the engagement portions 152 with the bent portions of the distal ends of the ribs 158 of the second inner lid 132, the support member 150 is supported to the second inner lid 132.
- the rod 165 is disposed between the pair of ribs 157 (see Fig. 9B ) of the second inner lid 132.
- the rod 165 has an upper surface including a front portion 165A, a rear portion 165B, and a sloped portion 165C connecting the front portion 165A to the rear portion 165B.
- the sloped portion 165C slopes downward from its front end to its rear end so that the front portion 165A is positioned further upward than the rear portion 165B.
- the rod 165 extends in the up-down direction.
- the rod 165 is inserted into the through-hole 139 (see Fig. 9A ) formed in the second inner lid 132.
- the seal member 166 is formed of an elastic material such as rubber. The seal member 166 is in pressure contact with the rod 165 without a gap between the seal member 166 and the rod 165. With this structure, no gap is formed between the seal member 166 and the rod 165.
- the valve body 161 is movable in the up-down direction from a closed position illustrated in Figs. 10 and 16 to an open position illustrated in Fig. 3 . Movement of the valve body 161 in the left-right direction and in the front-rear direction is restricted by the rib 156 and the ribs 157 of the second inner lid 132 (see Fig. 9B ).
- the rod 165 has protruding portions that protrude frontward and rearward, respectively. As illustrated in Figs. 10 and 16 , in a state where the valve body 161 is in the closed position, the rod 165 is supported by the second inner lid 132 such that lower surfaces of the protruding portions of the valve body 161 contact the upper surface 132A of the second inner lid 132. Further, in a state where the valve body 161 is in the closed position, the seal member 166 covers a peripheral edge portion of the through-hole 46. A gap between the through-hole 46 and the seal member 166 is thus closed. That is, the through-hole 46 is air-tightly and liquid-tightly closed by the rod 165 and the seal member 166. Accordingly, communication between the first storage chamber 32 and the outside of the ink cartridge 30 (i.e. the atmosphere) is interrupted.
- the valve body 161 in the open position is positioned further upward than the valve body 161 in the closed position (see Figs. 10 and 16 ).
- the lower surfaces of the protruding portions of the rod 165 is spaced apart upward from the upper surface 132A of the second inner lid 132.
- the seal member 166 is spaced apart upward from the peripheral edge portion of the through-hole 46.
- the through-hole 46 is open.
- the seal member 166 pressingly contacts the through-hole 139 from below and covers a peripheral edge portion of the through-hole 139. A gap between the seal member 166 and the through-hole 139 is thus closed. That is, the through-hole 139 is air-tightly and liquid-tightly closed by the rod 165 and the seal member 166.
- the coil spring 162 is fitted around the rod 165.
- the coil spring 162 has an upper end that is in contact with the rod 165 of the valve body 161 and a lower end that is in contact with the upper surface 132A of the second inner lid 132.
- the coil spring 162 In a state where the valve body 161 is in the closed position, the coil spring 162 has a length shorter than its natural length.
- the coil spring 162 urges the valve body 161 upward, that is, urges the valve body 161 in a direction from the closed position to the open position.
- a member for urging the valve body 161 is not limited to the coil spring 162.
- the valve body 161 may be urged by a leaf spring or an elastic member such as rubber.
- the lever 163 has a through-hole serving as a pivot shaft portion 167.
- the lever 163 includes a first projection 168 and a second projection 169.
- the first projection 168 and the second projection 169 extend outward from the pivot shaft portion 167.
- the support member 150 is provided with a pair of protrusions 170.
- One of the pair of protrusions 170 protrudes from an inner right surface of the support member 150 defining a right end of the internal space of the support member 150.
- the other of the pair of protrusions 170 protrudes from an inner left surface of the support member 150 defining a left end of the internal space of the support member 150.
- the protrusions 170 are inserted into the pivot shaft portion 167.
- the protrusion 170 protruding from the inner right surface of the support member 150 is inserted into the pivot shaft portion 167 from the right, and the protrusion 170 protruding from the inner left surface of the support member 150 is inserted into the pivot shaft portion 167 from the left.
- the lever 163 is supported by the support member 150 so as to be pivotally movable relative to the support member 150 about an axis of the pivot shaft portion 167.
- the pivot shaft portion 167 may be a protrusion that protrudes from the lever 163 rightward and leftward.
- the inner left and right surfaces of the support member 150 have openings, respectively, and the protrusion as the pivot shaft portion 167 is inserted in the openings.
- the first projection 168 and the second projection 169 extend in opposite directions with respect to the pivot shaft portion 167.
- the first projection 168 and the second projection 169 are substantially positioned on opposite sides of the pivot shaft portion 167.
- the first projection 168 extends in a direction away from the pivot shaft portion 167, and the second projection 169 extends in a direction substantially opposite to the extending direction of the first projection 168.
- the lever 163 is pivotally movable from a first position illustrated in Figs. 10 and 16 to a second position illustrated in Fig. 3 .
- the axis of the pivot shaft portion 167 functions as a pivot center when the lever 163 is pivotally moved between the first position and the second position.
- the first projection 168 extends downward.
- a rear edge of a distal end (i.e. lower end) of the first projection 168 is positioned rearward relative to the axis of the pivot shaft portion 167. More specifically, as illustrated in Fig. 10 , an imaginary line 172 connecting the axis of the pivot shaft portion 167 and the rear edge of the distal end of the first projection 168 is inclined rearward at a prescribed angle ⁇ 3 relative to an imaginary line 173 that extends from the axis of the pivot shaft portion 167 in the gravitational direction. In the embodiment, the prescribed angle ⁇ 3 is 5 degrees.
- the lower end of the first projection 168 contacts the rear portion 165B at the upper surface of the rod 165 of the valve body 161 to press the valve body 161 downward.
- the valve body 161 is placed in the closed position.
- the second projection 169 extends upward, more specifically, diagonally upward and rearward.
- the second projection 169 is positioned so as to be interposed between the pair of walls 114 of the protruding portion 43.
- the second projection 169 does not extend upward beyond the pair of walls 114. That is, an upper end of the second projection 169 is positioned downward relative to an upper end of the pair of walls 114..
- pivotal frontward movement of the first projection 168 i.e. pivotal clockwise movement of the lever 163 in Fig. 10 toward the second position, is restricted by the sloped portion 165C of the rod 165 of the valve body 161, and also restricted by the distal end of the first projection 168 positioned further rearward than the axis of the pivot shaft portion 167.
- the coil spring 162 is designed so as to have an upward urging force greater than a force required to move the first projection 168 from the rear portion 165B of the upper surface of the rod 165 of the valve body 161 to the front portion 165A thereof.
- the sloped portion 165C may be provided or may not be provided at the upper surface of the rod 165. Even if the sloped portion 165C is not provided and the rod 165 has a flat upper surface, the pivotal clockwise movement of the lever 163 in Fig. 10 toward the second position can be restricted as long as the distal end of the first projection 168 is positioned rearward relative to the axis of the pivot shaft portion 167.
- Pivotal rearward movement of the first projection 168 i.e. pivotal counterclockwise movement of the lever 163 in Fig. 10 , is restricted upon abutment of the lever 163 against a projection 171 provided on the inner right surface of the support member 150.
- the lever 163 is therefore maintained in the first position.
- the lever 163 in the first position restricts the valve body 161 from moving to the open position against the urging force of the coil spring 162 and maintains the valve body 161 at the closed position.
- the lever 163 when the lever 163 is in the second position, the lever 163 is spaced apart from the projection plate 111.
- the first projection 168 extends frontward.
- the second projection 169 extends downward, more specifically, diagonally downward and rearward. Further, the valve body 161 is in the open position.
- the ink supply portion 34 extends frontward from the connecting wall 49 at a position downward of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48 and frontward of the main bottom wall portion 42. As illustrated in Fig. 10 , the ink supply portion 34 is positioned downward of the inner bottom wall portion 45. Further, the ink supply portion 34 is positioned downward and rearward of the front wall 40.
- the ink supply portion 34 includes a cylinder 75, a packing 76, a valve 77, the coil spring 78, a cap 79, and a snap-fit mechanism 74.
- the cylinder 75 has an outer shape that is generally tubular or hollow cylindrical.
- the shape of the cylinder 75 is not limited to a circular cylindrical shape.
- the cylinder 75 may have any shape as long as the cylinder 75 is hollow.
- the cylinder 75 has a distal end (i.e. front end) directed frontward.
- the distal end of the cylinder 75 is positioned downward and rearward of the front wall 40.
- the cylinder 75 has an opening at its front end.
- the cylinder 75 defines an internal space serving as the ink valve chamber 35.
- the ink valve chamber 35 extends in the frontward direction 51 from the second storage chamber 33.
- the packing 76 is a disc-shape member and has a through-hole 73 at its center region.
- the packing 76 is made of an elastic material such as rubber or elastomer. As illustrated in Fig. 10 , the packing 76 is disposed at the front end of the cylinder 75 so as to cover the front opening of the cylinder 75.
- the through-hole 73 penetrates the center region of the packing 76 in the front-rear direction to provide a tubular-shaped inner peripheral surface.
- the through-hole 73 has an inner diameter slightly smaller than an outer diameter of the ink needle 102.
- the valve 77 and the coil spring 78 are accommodated in the ink valve chamber 35.
- the valve 77 can contact and separate from the packing 76 by moving in the front-rear direction.
- the through-hole 73 formed in the center region of the packing 76 is closed.
- the through-hole 73 is open.
- the coil spring 78 urges the valve 77 frontward. Accordingly, the valve 77 closes the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 while no external force is applied to the valve 77.
- the cap 79 has an outer shape that is generally rectangular parallelepiped.
- the cap 79 has a hollow configuration.
- the cap 79 may have an outer shape other than a rectangular parallelepiped provided that the cap 79 is a hollow member whose front end and rear end are open.
- the cap 79 has a rear end formed with an opening 87.
- the cylinder 75 and the packing 76 are inserted into an inner space of the cap 79 through the opening 87. Accordingly, the cap 79 covers the cylinder 75 and the packing 76 from a front side thereof.
- a lower end of the cap 79 is provided at a position substantially the same as a lower end of the cartridge casing 130 with respect to the up-down direction.
- the cap 79 has a front end wall having a front surface 79A.
- the front end wall of the cap 79 is formed with an ink supply port 71.
- the ink valve chamber 35 is in communication with the outside of the ink cartridge 30 through the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 and the ink supply port 71 of the cap 79.
- the ink supply portion 34 further includes a first absorbing member 182 and a second absorbing member 183. As illustrated in Fig. 10 , the first absorbing member 182 and the second absorbing member 183 are disposed in the inner space of the cap 79.
- the first absorbing member 182 and the second absorbing member 183 are formed of a porous material such as polyurethane foam.
- the first absorbing member 182 and the second absorbing member 183 have minute holes provided by the porous material. Ink enters the minute holes, so that the ink is absorbed by the first absorbing member 182 and the second absorbing member 183.
- the first absorbing member 182 and the second absorbing member 183 are thus adapted to absorb ink.
- the first absorbing member 182 has an annular shape, as illustrated in Fig. 12 .
- the first absorbing member 182 is disposed along a circumferential edge defining the ink supply port 71. That is, the first absorbing member 182 is disposed adjacent to a circumferential edge portion of the ink supply port 71.
- the first absorbing member 182 may not have an annular shape.
- the first absorbing member 182 may have a rectangular shape. In this case, the first absorbing member 182 may be disposed only at a position downward of the circumferential edge defining the ink supply port 71.
- the second absorbing member 183 has a plate-like shape.
- the second absorbing member 183 is positioned rearward relative to the first absorbing member 182.
- the second absorbing member 183 is supported by an inner lower surface of the cap 79 so as to be disposed in a lower portion of the inner space of the cap 79, that is, at a position downward relative to the ink valve chamber 35.
- the inner lower surface of the cap 79 is a surface defining a lower end of the inner space of the cap 79.
- the second absorbing member 183 need not have a plate-like shape. Further, the second absorbing member 183 may be disposed over an entire inner peripheral surface of the cap 79 defining the inner space of the cap 79.
- At least one groove 184 extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the inner peripheral surface of the cap 79, more specifically, the inner lower surface of the cap 79.
- the groove 184 has a front end connected to the first absorbing member 182.
- the front end of the groove 184 may be positioned in proximity to the first absorbing member 182.
- the groove 184 has a rear end connected to the second absorbing member 183.
- the rear end of the groove 184 may be positioned in proximity to the second absorbing member 183. That is, the groove 184 is formed in the cap 79 at a region from the circumferential edge portion of the ink supply port 71 to the second absorbing member 183.
- first absorbing member 182 and the second absorbing member 183 may not be disposed in the inner space of the cap 79. Further, the groove 184 may not be formed at the inner lower surface of the cap 79. In a state where the cap 79 covers the cylinder 75 and the packing 76, the inner peripheral surface of the cap 79 and an outer peripheral surface of the cylinder 75 provide a gap therebetween. Even if the groove 184 is not formed at the inner lower surface of the cap 79, ink leaked from the cylinder 75 is introduced to the second absorbing member 183 via the gap.
- the cap 79 has an outer peripheral surface extending rearward from the front surface 79A.
- the outer peripheral surface of the cap 79 is formed with four guide grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D.
- Each of the four grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D has a front edge that opens on the front surface 79A.
- the guide groove 175A is provided at an upper-right end portion of the cap 79.
- the guide groove 175B is provided at an upper-left end portion of the cap 79.
- the guide groove 175C is provided at a lower-right end portion of the cap 79.
- the guide groove 175D is provided at a lower-left end portion of the cap 79.
- the guide groove 175A and the guide groove 175D are disposed on opposite sides of the ink valve chamber 35 in a first perpendicular direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction.
- the guide groove 175B and the guide grove 175C are disposed on opposite sides of the ink valve chamber 35 in a second perpendicular direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction and the first perpendicular direction.
- the first perpendicular direction is a direction connecting from the upper-right side of the cap 79 to the lower-left side of the cap 79
- the second perpendicular direction is a direction connecting from the upper-left side of the cap 79 to the lower-right side of the cap 79.
- the outer shape of the cap 79 is generally rectangular parallelepiped. That is, when projected in the front-rear direction, the cap 79 has a projection plane having a generally rectangular shape defined by four sides and four corners connecting two adjacent sides.
- the four guide grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D are formed at the four corners, respectively.
- the front surface 79A of the cap 79 has a generally rectangular shape in a front view, more specifically, when the front surface 79A is viewed from its front side, and the front edges of the four guide grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D are formed respective corners of the front surface 79A.
- the guide grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D are each defined by two protrusions formed at the outer peripheral surface of the cap 79.
- the cap 79 has four protrusions at the outer peripheral surface thereof.
- two protrusions protrude rightward and leftward, respectively, such that the ink supply port 71 is disposed between the two protrusions in the left-right direction.
- the two protrusions have respective upper end surfaces serving as a first guide surface 176 of the guide grooves 175A and a first guide surface 176 of the guide groove 175B, respectively.
- the two protrusions have respective lower end surfaces serving as a first guide surface 176 of the guide grooves 175C and a first guide surface176 of the guide groove 175D, respectively.
- guide grooves 175 are elongated in the front-rear direction. Hence, a longitudinal direction of the guide grooves 175 is aligned with the front-rear direction.
- the guide grooves 175A and 175C are positioned rightward relative to the IC board 64.
- the guide grooves 175B and 175D are positioned leftward relative to the IC board 64. That is, of the four guide grooves 175, two guide grooves 175 are positioned outward of the IC board 64 in one of the rightward direction 55 and the leftward direction 56, while the remaining two guide grooves 175 are positioned outward of the IC board 64 in the other of the rightward direction 55 and the leftward direction 56.
- each of the four guide grooves 175 need not be positioned outward of the IC board 64 in the left-right direction.
- the guide groove 175A has a shape and arrangement that is symmetrical to the guide groove 175B with respect to the left-right direction.
- Each of the guide grooves 175A and 175B has the first guide surface 176 and a second guide surface 177.
- the guide groove 175C has a shape and arrangement that is symmetrical to the guide groove 175D with respect to the left-right direction.
- Each of the guide grooves 175C and 175D has the first guide surface 176, the second guide surface 177, and a third guide surface 178. Note that the third guide surface 178 of the guide groove 175C does not appear in Fig. 13B . However, the third guide surface 178 of the guide groove 175C is identical with the third guide surface 178 of the guide groove 175D.
- the first guide surface 176 extends in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction.
- the third guide surface 178 extends in the left-right direction and a direction sloped relative to the front-rear direction so that its rear end is positioned further upward than its front end. That is, the third guide surface 178 is sloped relative to the front-rear direction.
- the third guide surface 178 is positioned rearward relative to the first guide surface 176.
- the first guide surface 176 has a rear end continuous to a front end of the third guide surface 178.
- the second guide surface 177 extends in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.
- the second guide surface 177 is connected to the first guide surface 176.
- the second guide surface 177 is connected to both the first guide surface 176 and the third guide surface 178.
- the first guide surface 176, the second guide surface 177, and the third guide surface 178 need not be connected to each other.
- the third guide surface 178 is inclined relative to the front-rear direction at an angle ⁇ 1, and the bottom surface of the main bottom wall portion 42 is inclined relative to the front-rear direction at an angle ⁇ 2.
- the angle ⁇ 1 is greater than the angle ⁇ 2.
- each guide groove 175 The rear end of the first guide surface 176 of each guide grooves 175 is positioned rearward relative to a front end of the packing 76.
- the first guide surface 176 of each of the guide grooves 175A and 175B faces upward.
- the first guide surface 176 of each of the guide grooves 175C and 175D faces downward.
- the third guide surface 178 of each of the guide grooves 175C and 175D faces downward.
- the second guide surface 177 of each of the guide grooves 175A and 175C faces rightward.
- the second guide surface 177 of each of the guide grooves 175B and 175D faces leftward.
- each of the guide grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D is provided in a form of an L-shaped recess constituted by the first guide surface 176 and the second guide surface 177. That is, the front edge of each of the guide grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D forms an L-shape on the front surface 79A in the front view, more specifically, when the front surface 79A is viewed from its front side. No surface is formed in the cap 79 at positions confronting each of the first guide surfaces 176, each of the second guide surfaces 177, and each of the third guide surfaces 178.
- each of the guide grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D is open in a direction perpendicular to the first guide surface 176. Further, each of the guide grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D is open in a direction perpendicular to the second guide surface 177. Still further, each of the guide grooves 175C and 175D is open in a direction perpendicular to the third guide surface 178. That is, each of the first guide surfaces 176 is open in a direction perpendicular thereto. Further, each of the second guide surfaces 177 is open in a direction perpendicular thereto. Still further, each of the third guide surfaces 178 is open in a direction perpendicular thereto.
- first guide surface 176 of each of the guide grooves 175A and 175B is open upward, and the first guide surface 176 of each of the guide grooves 175C and 175D is open downward.
- second guide surface 177 of each of the guide grooves 175A and 175C is open rightward, and the second guide surface 177 of each of the guide grooves 175B and 175D is open leftward.
- third guide surface 178 of each of the guide grooves 175C and 175D is open downward.
- the first guide surface 176 forms a prescribed angle with the second guide surface 177.
- an angle formed by the first guide surface 176 and the second guide surface 177 is 90 degrees.
- the second guide surface 177 has a dimension in the up-down direction greater than a dimension of the first guide surface 176 in the left-right direction.
- the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into the cartridge attachment section 110 in the frontward direction 51.
- the projection 105A disposed at the upper-right side relative to the ink needle 102 enters the guide groove 175A
- the projection 105B disposed at the upper-left side relative to the ink needle 102 enters the guide groove 175B
- the projection 105C disposed at the lower-right side relative to the ink needle 102 enters the guide groove 175C
- the projection 105D disposed at the lower-left side relative to the ink needle 102 enters the guide groove 175D.
- the guide grooves 175A, 175B, 175C, and 175D are guided by the projections 105A, 105B, 105C, and 105D, respectively.
- the first guide surface 176 of the guide groove 175A is guided by the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105A, and the second guide surface 177 of the guide groove 175A is guided by the second guide surface 197 of the projection 105A.
- the first guide surface 176 of the guide groove 175B is guided by the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105B, and the second guide surface 177 of the guide groove 175B is guided by the second guide surface 197 of the projection 105B.
- the first guide surface 176 of the guide groove 175C is guided by the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105C, and the second guide surface 177 of the guide groove 175C is guided by the second guide surface 197 of the projection 105C.
- the first guide surface 176 of the guide groove 175D is guided by the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105D, and the second guide surface 177 of the guide groove 175D is guided by the second guide surface 197 of the projection 105D.
- the third guide surface 178 of the guide groove 175C is positioned above the projection 105C disposed at the lower-right side relative to the ink needle 102, and the third guide surface 178 of the guide groove 175D is positioned above the projection 105D disposed at the lower-left side relative to the ink needle 102.
- a space is formed between the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105C and the third guide surface 178 of the guide groove 175C in the up-down direction.
- a space is also formed between the first guide surface 196 of the projection 105D and the third guide surface 178 of the guide groove 175D in the up-down direction.
- the spaces formed between the first guide surfaces 196 and the third guide surfaces 178 allow the ink cartridge 30 to be pivotally movable in the case 101.
- the guide grooves 175 need not be formed at the upper-right end portion, the upper-left end portion, the lower-right end portion, and the lower-left end portion of the cap 79 provided that the guide grooves 175 are respectively formed in the cap 79 at positions corresponding to the projections 105 of the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the guide grooves 175 may be respectively formed at a left-right center portion of an upper surface of the cap 79, a left-right center portion of a lower surface of the cap 79, a vertical (up-down) center portion of a right surface of the cap 79, and a vertical (up-down) center portion of a left surface of the cap 79.
- three or less guide grooves 175, or five or more guide grooves 175 may be formed at the cap 79. That is, the cap 79 may be formed with at least one guide groove 175.
- the cap 79 may be formed with two guide grooves 175, instead of four guide grooves 175.
- the two guide grooves 175 may be formed so as to be arranged in the up-down direction or in the left-right direction.
- the guide grooves 175A and 175C may be formed in the cap 79; or the guide grooves 175B and 175D may be formed in the cap 79.
- the guide grooves 175A and 175B may be formed at the cap 79; or the guide grooves 175C and 175D may be formed at the cap 79.
- Each of the guide grooves 175 may have a surface that opposes the first guide surface 176.
- the guide groove 175 is defined by at least the surface opposing the first guide surface 176, the first guide surface 176, and the second guide surface 177.
- the first guide surface 176 is not open in the direction perpendicular to the first guide surface 176 in this case.
- each of the guide grooves 175 may have a surface that opposes the second guide surface 177.
- the guide groove 175 is defined by at least the surface opposing the second guide surface 177, the first guide surface 176, and the second guide surface 177.
- the second guide surface 177 is not open in the direction perpendicular to the second guide surface 177 in this case.
- each of the guide grooves 175C and 175D need not have the third guide surface 178.
- each of the guide grooves 175C and 175D is defined only by the first guide surface 176 and the second guide surface 177, similar to the guide grooves 175A and 175B.
- the snap-fit mechanism 74 illustrated in Fig. 12 is configured to engage the cap 79 with one of the cartridge casing 130 and the cylinder 75. In the embodiment, the snap-fit mechanism 74 engages the cap 79 with the cartridge casing 130.
- the snap-fit mechanism 74 includes four projecting portions 179 and two projections 180. Two of the four projecting portions 179 are provided at the right side wall 37 of the cartridge casing 130, and the remaining two of the four projecting portions 179 are provided at the left side wall 38 of the cartridge casing 130. Accordingly, in the embodiment, the four projecting portions 179 are provided at the cartridge casing 130. The two projections 180 are provided at the cap 79.
- the two projecting portions 179 protrude rightward from the right side wall 37 and are spaced apart from each other in the up-down direction.
- the two projecting portions 179 protruding from the right side wall 37 do not appear in Fig. 12 .
- the remaining two projecting portions 179 protrude leftward from the left side wall 38 and are spaced apart from each other in the up-down direction.
- a set of the two projecting portions 179 provided at the right side wall 37 has a shape and arrangement that is symmetrical to a set of the remaining two projecting portions 179 with respect to the left-right direction.
- each of the left side wall 37 and the right side wall 38 is formed with a recess that is recessed rearward.
- each recess is adapted to receive corresponding projection 180. That is, the snap-fit mechanism 74 includes the two projections 180, and the two recesses adapted to receive the corresponding projections 180.
- the projecting portions 179 may protrude from the cylinder 75 of the ink supply portion 34. As illustrated in Fig. 6 , each of the projecting portions 179 has an engagement surface 179A facing rearward.
- each of the two projections 180 protrudes in an axial direction of the cap 79 from an edge portion defining the opening 87 of the cap 79.
- the axial direction of the cap 79 coincides with the front-rear direction, and the projections 180 protrude rearward from the cap 79.
- the projections 180 may protrude in a direction other than the rearward direction 52 provided that the cap 79 is capable of being engaged with the casing 130 by means of snap-fitting.
- One of the two projections 180 protrudes rearward from the cap 79 at a position rightward of the opening 87.
- the remaining one of the two projections 180 protrudes rearward from the cap 79 at a position leftward of the opening 87. That is, the two projections 180 are arranged to oppose each other in the left-right direction such that the opening 87 is interposed between the two projections 180.
- the one of the two projections 180 faces the right side wall 37 in the left-right direction
- the remaining one of the two projections 180 faces the left side wall 38 in the left-right direction.
- the two projections 180 are arranged to oppose each other in the left-right direction, with the cartridge casing 130 interposed therebetween.
- Each of the two projections 180 has an upper end positioned downward relative to an upper end of the cap 79, and a lower end positioned upward relative to a lower end of the cap 79.
- the two projections 180 does not protrude outward of an outer peripheral edge of the cap 79. In other words, when the cap 79 is viewed from its rear side, the two projections 180 are positioned inward of the outer peripheral edge of the cap 79.
- each of the projections 180 may have a portion positioned outward of the outer peripheral edge of the cap 79 when the cap 79 is viewed from its rear side.
- the upper end of each projection 180 may be positioned upward relative to the upper end of the cap 79.
- the lower end of each projection 180 may be positioned downward relative to the lower end of the cap 79.
- Each of the projections 180 has a length in the up-down direction so that the length in the up-down direction at its rear end is smaller than the length in the up-down direction at its front end. That is, each projection 180 has such a tapered shape that its length in the up-down direction is gradually reduced toward its distal end (i.e. rear end). Incidentally, each of the projections 180 may not have a tapered shape described above.
- Each of the projections 180 has a distal end portion 180A and a pair of engagement pawls 181.
- One of the pair of engagement pawls 181 protrudes upward (more specifically, diagonally upward and forward) from an upper surface of the distal end portion 180A.
- the remaining one of the pair of engagement pawls 181 protrudes downward (more specifically, diagonally downward and forward) from a lower surface of the distal end portion 180A.
- Each of the engagement pawls 181 has a shape narrower than that of the distal end portion 180A. In other words, each engagement pawl 181 has a length in the up-down direction smaller than that of the remaining part of the projection 180.
- each engagement pawl 181 is resiliently deformable so as to be movable relative to the distal end portion 180A of the projection 180. More specifically, each engagement pawl 181 is configured to be resiliently deformed so as to be pivotally movable in the up-down direction about a base end thereof (i.e., a portion connected to the distal end portion 180A).
- each protrusion 180 is received in the corresponding recess provided at the casing 130, and each engagement pawl 181 is engaged with the engagement surface 179A of the corresponding projecting portion 179 (see Fig. 6 ). More specifically, the pair of engagement pawls 181 of the projection 180 disposed rightward of the opening 87 is engaged with the engagement surfaces 179A of the two projecting portions 179 protruding rightward from the right side wall 37, while the pair of engagement pawls 181 of the projection 180 disposed leftward of the opening 87 is engaged with the engagement surfaces 179A of the two projecting portions 179 protruding leftward from the left side wall 38. By virtue of these engagements, the cap 79 is retained at the attached state to the cartridge casing 130.
- an inner surface 79B of the front end wall of the cap 79 (i.e. a surface opposite to the front surface 79A) is positioned frontward relative to the packing 76 and in pressure contact with the packing 76.
- the front end of the cylinder 75 is positioned rearward relative to the packing 76 and in pressure contact with the packing 76. Therefore, the packing 76 is fixed between the cap 79 and the cylinder 75, while interposed therebetween. A gap between the packing 76 and the cylinder 75, and a gap between the packing 76 and the cap 79 are liquid-tightly sealed.
- the cap 79 In a state where the cap 79 covers the cylinder 75 and the packing 76 from a front side thereof, the cap 79 is positioned downward and rearward relative to the front wall 40.
- the snap-fit mechanism 74 engages the cap 79 with the cartridge casing 130.
- the snap-fit mechanism 74 may engage the cap 79 with the cylinder 75 of the ink supply portion 34.
- the projecting portions 179 may protrude from an outer circumferential surface of the cylinder 75.
- the two projections 180 are arranged to oppose each other such that the cylinder 75 is interposed between the two projections 180.
- the valve 77 is in contact with the packing 76 to close the through-hole 73. Accordingly, at this time, ink flow from the ink valve chamber 35 to the outside of the ink cartridge 30 is interrupted. Further, the lever 163 is in the first position. The valve body 161 is in the closed position as the first projection 168 of the lever 163 in the first position presses the rod 165 of the valve body 161 downward. In this state, the through-hole 46 is closed by the rod 165 and the seal member 166 of the valve body 161. Therefore, the first storage chamber 32 is not opened to the atmosphere. That is, communication between the first storage chamber 32 and the outside of the ink cartridge 30 is interrupted.
- the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into the case 101 through the opening 112 of the cartridge attachment section 110, with the front wall 40, 82 facing frontward and the top wall 39 facing upward. That is, the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the case 101 while moved in the frontward direction 51 (i.e. attachment direction).
- the user inserts the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge attachment section 110, while pushing the rear wall 41, 83 frontward.
- the lower end portion of the ink cartridge 30 enters the guide groove 109 formed in the bottom wall of the case 101.
- the projections 105 advance into the corresponding guide grooves 175 of the ink supply portion 34 as illustrated in Fig. 15 .
- the guide grooves 175 are thus guided by the projections 105, respectively.
- the projections 105 advance into the guide grooves 175, respectively, the first guide surface 176 of the guide groove 175C and the first guide surface 176 of the guide groove 175D are supported by the projection 105C disposed at the lower-right side relative to the ink needle 102 and the projection 105D disposed at the lower-left side relative to the ink needle 102, respectively.
- the projection 105A disposed at the upper-right side relative to the ink needle 102 and the projection 105B disposed at the upper-left side relative to the ink needle 102 are positioned in proximity to and above the first guide surface 176 of the guide groove 175A and the first guide surface 176 of the guide groove 175B, respectively.
- the ink supply portion 34 is fixed in position relative to the case 101 with respect to the up-down direction.
- the projection 105A disposed at the upper-right side relative to the ink needle 102 and the projection 105C disposed at the lower-right side relative to the ink needle 102 are positioned in proximity to and rightward of the second guide surface 177 of the guide groove 175A and the second guide surface 177 of the guide groove 175C, respectively.
- the projection 105B disposed at the upper-left side relative to the ink needle 102 and the projection 105D disposed at the lower-left side relative to the ink needle 102 are positioned in proximity to and leftward of the second guide surface 177 of the guide groove 175B and the second guide surface 177 of the guide groove 175D, respectively.
- the ink supply portion 34 is fixed in position relative to the case 101 with respect to the left-right direction.
- the ink needle 102 advances into the inner space of the cap 79 through the ink supply port 71 to be press-fitted into the through-hole 73 of the packing 76.
- the ink supply portion 34 is fixed in position relative to the case 101 in the up-down direction and in left-right direction. Hence, the ink needle 102 can pass through a center portion of the ink supply port 71, without abutting against the cap 79.
- the ink needle 102 enters the ink valve chamber 35 and moves the valve 77 away from the packing 76 against the urging force of the coil spring 78 (see Fig. 19 ).
- the ink needle 102 is thus connected to the ink supply portion 34 to allow communication with each other.
- the ink is allowed to flow from the first storage chamber 32 and the second storage chamber 33 into the inner space of the ink needle 102 through the ink valve chamber 35.
- the urging force of the coil spring 78 is exerted on the ink cartridge 30 to urge the ink cartridge 30 rearward.
- the rear ends of the projections 105C, 105D moves past the first guide surfaces 176 of the guide grooves 175C, 175D and are positioned downward of the third guide surfaces 178 of the guide grooves 175C, 175D, respectively.
- Spaces are respectively formed in the up-down direction between the third guide surfaces 178 of the guide grooves 175C, 175D and the projections 105C, 105D.
- the main bottom wall portion 42 of the cartridge casing 130 slopes relative to the front-rear direction such that the bottom end at the front end portion of the main bottom wall portion 42 is positioned downward relative to the bottom end at the rear end portion of the main bottom wall portion 42.
- a space is formed in the up-down direction between the main bottom wall portion 42 and the bottom of the case 101.
- These spaces permit the ink cartridge 30 to be pivotally movable about the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 so that the rear portion of the ink cartridge 30 is moved downward in a state where the ink needle 102 is force-fitted into the through-hole 73 and is in contact with the through-hole 73.
- the through-hole 73 at this time serves as a pivot center of this pivotal movement of the ink cartridge 30.
- the lock shaft 145 of the cartridge attachment section 110 contacts the sloped surfaces 155 of the pair of walls 114 and is guided along the sloped surfaces 155 (see Fig. 15 ). At this time, the sloped surfaces 155 receive a downward reaction force from the lock shaft 145. As a result, the ink cartridge 30 is pivotally moved, with the rear portion of the ink cartridge 30 moved downward (see Figs. 18 and 19 ).
- the projection plate 111 of the case 101 enter the space between the pair of walls 114 as illustrated in Fig. 19 .
- the lever 163 has also been moved downward.
- the bottom surface 111A of the projection plate 111 has not yet contacted the lever 163 although the bottom surface 111A is positioned above the lever 163.
- the lock shaft 145 moves past the sloped surfaces 155 and the horizontal surfaces 154 and is positioned further rearward than the lock surface 151 as illustrated in Fig. 19 .
- the lock shaft 145 is slightly spaced apart from the ink cartridge 30.
- a space is formed below the lock shaft 145.
- the ink cartridge 30 therefore receives no reaction force from the lock shaft 145.
- the ink cartridge 30 is pivotally moved about the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 so that the rear portion of the ink cartridge 30 moves upward (see Figs. 3 and 20 ).
- the posture of the ink cartridge 30 illustrated in Figs. 3 and 20 is the operational posture, that is, the upright posture.
- the lever 163 As the rear portion of the ink cartridge 30 is moved upward as a result of the pivotal movement of the ink cartridge 30, the lever 163 is also moved upward. Accordingly, a surface 169A at the distal end (i.e. upper end) of the second projection 169 of the lever 163 contacts the bottom surface 111A of the projection plate 111 from below. In other words, the lever 163 can access the projection plate 111 while moving upward. Note that the lever 163 comes into contact with the bottom surface 111A of the projection plate 111 after the ink needle 102 enters the ink valve chamber 35, that is, after the ink needle 102 is connected to the ink supply portion 34 (see Figs. 3 , 17 , and 19 ).
- the second projection 169 receives a downward reaction force from the projection plate 111.
- the lever 163 receives a force pivotally moving in a clockwise direction in Fig. 19 .
- This force is greater than a force required to move the first projection 168 from the rear portion 165B at the upper surface of the rod 165 of the valve body 161 to the front portion 165A thereof.
- the lever 163 can therefore pivotally move in the clockwise direction in Fig. 19 from the first position toward the second position (see also Fig. 3 ).
- the first projection 168 of the lever 163 moves over the sloped portion 165C at the upper surface of the rod 165 of the valve body 161, and thus, moves from the rear portion 165B thereof to the front portion 165A thereof.
- the valve body 161 slightly moves downward as the rod 165 is pushed downward by the lever 163.
- the first projection 168 of the lever 163 stops pushing the valve body 161 downward.
- the lever 163 no longer maintains the valve body 161 in the closed position. That is, the lever 163 in the second position releases restriction against the movement of the valve body 161 to the open position.
- valve body 161 moves upward from the closed position to the open position by virtue of the urging force of the coil spring 162 (see Fig. 3 ), thereby opening the through-hole 46. Consequently, the first storage chamber 32 is open to the atmosphere through the through-hole 46, the air chamber 36, the labyrinth path 143, and the communication hole 147. That is, the valve body 161 in the open position allows communication between the first storage chamber 32 and the air communication passage 72.
- the lever 163 in the second position is spaced apart from the projection plate 111. Further, the seal member 166 is in pressure contact with the through-hole 139 from below, covering the peripheral edge portion of the through-hole 139. The gap between the seal member 166 and the through-hole 139 is air-tightly and liquid-tightly closed.
- the valve body 161 needs to be first pushed downward and then moved upward. This configuration can suppress unintentional movement of the valve body 161 to the open position.
- the movement of the lever 163 is irreversible. That is, the lever 163 can be moved from the first position to the second position by abutting against the projection plate 111. However, even if the ink cartridge 30 is removed from the case 101, the lever 163 cannot be returned to the first position once the lever 163 is moved into the second position. The movement of the valve body 161 is also irreversible, accordingly.
- the light-blocking plate 67 (specifically, the portion of the light-blocking plate 67 where the cutout 66 is formed) is positioned between the light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor 113 (see Fig. 2 ).
- the printer 10 can determine that the ink cartridge 30 has been attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the optical sensor 113 is not illustrated.
- each electrode 65 of the IC board 64 electrically contacts the corresponding contact 106 while resiliently deforming the contact 106 upward.
- the lock surface 151 When the ink cartridge 30 is pivotally moved so that the rear portion of the ink cartridge 30 moves upward, the lock surface 151 also moves upward. Then, when the ink cartridge 30 is placed into the state illustrated in Figs. 3 and 20 , the lock surface 151 faces rearward and opposes the lock shaft 145. When the user stops pushing the ink cartridge 30 frontward in this state, the ink cartridge 30 moves rearward due to the urging force of the coil spring 78. Since the lock surface 151 faces rearward and opposes the lock shaft 145, the lock shaft 145 abuts on the lock surface 151 and engages with the lock surface 151 when the ink cartridge 30 moves rearward.
- This engagement between the lock shaft 145 and the lock surface 151 restricts the ink cartridge 30 from moving further rearward. In this way, the ink cartridge 30 is held in the attached position by the engagement between the lock shaft 145 and the lock surface 151.
- the ink cartridge 30 can thus adopt the operational posture as a result of access of the lock surface 151 (ink cartridge 30) to the lock shaft 145 (more specifically, a surface at a front end of the lock shaft 145) in the upward direction 54.
- the ink cartridge 30 when the ink cartridge 30 has been attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 as a result of insertion, in the frontward direction 51, of the ink needle 102 into the ink supply portion 34 and as a result of engagement of the lock surface 151 with the lock shaft 145, the ink cartridge 30 takes an attachment posture.
- the ink cartridge 30 takes the attachment posture, the ink cartridge 30 is capable of supplying ink to the recording head 21 and being operated by the printer 10 for recording images.
- the user pushes the operation surface 92 downward in a state illustrated in Figs. 3 and 20 .
- the operation surface 92 is pushed downward, the ink cartridge 30 is pivotally moved about the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 as the pivot center, with its rear portion moving downward (see Figs. 18 and 19 ).
- the lock surface 151 is thus moved to a position downward relative to the lock shaft 145.
- the ink cartridge 30 is no longer restricted from moving rearward.
- the ink cartridge 30 moves rearward relative to the cartridge attachment section 110 by the urging force of the coil spring 78.
- the user can take the ink cartridge 30 out of the cartridge attachment section 110 while holding the cartridge casing 130.
- the first storage chamber 32 remains opened to the atmosphere even after the ink cartridge 30 is removed from the cartridge attachment section 110 since the valve body 161 remains in the open position.
- the ink cartridge 30K includes a front wall 240, 282, a rear wall 241, 283, a top wall 239, a bottom wall 242, 248, the right side wall 37, 84, and the left side wall 38, 85.
- the front wall 240, 282 and the rear wall 241, 283 of the ink cartridge 30K have dimensions in the left-right direction greater than those of the front wall 40, 82 and the rear wall 41, 83 of the respective three ink cartridges 30 corresponding to three colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow (see Fig. 4 ), respectively.
- the front wall 240, 282 and the rear wall 241, 283 of the ink cartridge 30K expand rightward. Accordingly, the ink supply portion 34, the IC board 64, the protruding portion 43 and the operation portion 90 of the ink cartridge 30K are positioned leftward relative to a left-right center of the ink cartridge 30K. However, the light-blocking plate 67 of the ink cartridge 30K is positioned at the left-right center of the ink cartridge 30K.
- the ink cartridge 30K corresponding to a color of black differs from the ink cartridges 30 corresponding to respective colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow in that the front wall 240, 282 and the rear wall 241, 283 of the ink cartridge 30K expand rightward.
- a structure of the ink cartridge 30K different from the ink cartridges 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow will be described in detail.
- the ink cartridge 30K has a subordinate bottom wall portion 248 having an upper surface 248A.
- the upper surface 248A is continuous with an upper surface 245A of an inner bottom wall portion 245, as illustrated in Fig. 25 .
- the upper surface 248A includes the curved surface 115A, the curved surface 116A, and an intermediate surface 120A.
- the intermediate surface 120A is a flat surface, and is connected to the curved surface 115A at its right end and to the curved surface 116A at its left end.
- the intermediate surface 120A of the upper surface 248A slopes relative to the left-right direction so that its left end is positioned further downward than its right end.
- the left end of the intermediate surface 120A of the upper surface 248A is a lowermost portion of the upper surface 248A. That is, the left end of the intermediate surface 120A of the upper surface 248A is a lowermost portion of the first storage chamber 32 at its front portion.
- the intermediate surface 120A of the upper surface 248A may slope relative to the left-right direction so that its right end is positioned further downward than its left end.
- the intermediate surface 120A of the upper surface 248A may not slope relative to the left-right direction, that is, may be a non-sloped flat surface parallel to the horizontal direction.
- the intermediate surface 120A of the upper surface 248A is made to be flat and connected to the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38 via the curved surface 116A, thereby enlarging a dimension in the widthwise direction (i.e. left-right direction) of the first storage chamber 32 of the ink cartridge 30K.
- a larger amount of ink can be stored in the first storage chamber 32 of the ink cartridge 30K than in the first storage chamber 32 of the ink cartridge 30 illustrated in Fig. 14 .
- the curved surface 115A extends downward from the lower end of the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, and the curved surface 116A extends downward from the lower end of the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- the curved surface 115A is continuously connected to the lower end of the inner surface 37A of the right side wall 37, and the curved surface 116A is continuously connected to the lower end of the inner surface 38A of the left side wall 38.
- the curved surface 115A has a lower end connected to the right end of the intermediate surface 120A.
- the curved surface 116A has a lower end connected to the left end of the intermediate surface 120A.
- the left end of the intermediate surface 120A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 248 constitutes the lowermost portion of the front portion of the first storage chamber 32 of the ink cartridge 30K. That is, the lower end of the curved surface 115A and the lower end of the curved surface 116A are connected to the intermediate surface 120A of the upper surface 248A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 248 that includes the lowermost portion of the front portion of the first storage chamber 32.
- the upper surface 248A further includes the curved surface 119A (see Fig. 10 ) continuously connected to a lower end of the inner surface 241A of the rear wall 241.
- the inner curved surface 117A, the inner curved surface 118A, and the inner curved surface 119A of the ink cartridge 30K each have a configuration the same as that in the embodiment described above, except that an inner surface 240A of the front wall 240 has a dimension in the left-right direction greater than that of the inner surface 40A of the front wall 40 of the ink cartridge 30 (see Fig. 25 ).
- the lower end of the curved surface 115A and the lower end of the curved surface 116A are connected to the intermediate surface 120A of the upper surface 248A of the subordinate bottom wall portion 248.
- the lower end of the curved surface 115A and the lower end of the curved surface 116A may be continuously connected to each other.
- the upper surface 245A may include a curved surface continuously connected to a lower end of an inner surface 241A of the rear wall 241 as in the embodiment.
- first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 have shapes as illustrated in Figs. 8A and 8B .
- first ribs 185 and the corresponding second rib 186 are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction and have at least the inclining portion 185B and the inclining portion 186B, respectively, the first ribs 185 and the second ribs 186 may not have the shapes illustrated in Figs. 8A and 8B .
- Fig. 26A illustrates a first inner lid 1131 including first ribs 1185 and second ribs 1186 according to a first variation to the embodiment.
- Each of the first ribs 1185 includes an extending portion 1185A and an inclining portion 185B.
- Each of the second ribs 1186 includes an extending portion 1186A and an inclining portion 1186B.
- Each one of the first ribs 1185 opposes corresponding one of the second ribs 1186 in the left-right direction.
- a distal end (i.e. rear end) of an inclining portion 1185B of each first rib 1185 may be arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction as a distal end (i.e. rear end) of an inclining portion 1186B of the corresponding second rib 1186.
- Fig. 26B illustrates a first inner lid 2131 including first ribs 2185 and second ribs 2186 according to a second variation to the embodiment.
- Each of the first ribs 2185 includes an inclining portion 2185B.
- Each of the second ribs 2186 includes an inclining portion 2186B.
- Fig. 26C illustrates a first inner lid 3131 including first ribs 3185 and second ribs 3186 according to a third variation to the embodiment.
- Each of the first ribs 3185 includes an inclining portion 3185B.
- Each of the second ribs 3186 includes an inclining portion 3186B.
- FIG. 26B At least one of the first rib 2185 and the second rib 2186 need not have the extending portion.
- at least one of the first rib 3185 and the second rib 3186 need not have the extending portion. Note that Figs. 26B and 26C illustrate configurations in which each of the first ribs 2185, 3185 does not have the extending portion and each of the second ribs 2186, 3186 does not have the extending portion.
- the lower ends of the first ribs 185 and the lower ends of the second ribs 186 are provided at heights the same as one another.
- the lower ends of the first ribs 185 and the lower ends of the second ribs 186 may be provided at heights different from one another.
- the ribs 185, 186 positioned closer to the front-rear center of the side walls 37, 38 may protrude further downward.
- the protruding length of the first rib 185 may not be uniform across the entire region thereof.
- the protruding length of the second rib 186 may not be uniform across the entire region thereof.
- the base ends of the extending portions 185A, 186A respectively contacting the inner surfaces 37A, 38A of the side walls 37, 38 and portions near the distal ends of the extending portions 185A, 186A may protrude further downward than any other portions than the base end portions.
- the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38 of the cartridge casing 130 has translucency so that the surface level of the ink stored in the first storage chamber 32 and the surface level of the ink stored in the second storage chamber 33 can be visually recognized from the outside of the ink cartridge 30. Further, the front wall 40, the rear wall 41 and the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38 are exposed to an outside and constitute the outer surfaces of the cartridge casing 130, except for their upper end portions engaged with the outer lid 134.
- each of the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38 may have at least a portion forming the outer wall of the cartridge casing 130, that is, the wall of the cartridge casing 130 whose outer surface is exposed to the outside.
- a label may be adhered to a portion of the outer surface of one of the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38, and the portion to which the label is adhered may degrade visual recognition to the surface level of the ink stored in each of the first storage chamber 32 and the second storage chamber 33 from the outside of the ink cartridge 30.
- a portion of each of the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38 except for the portion to which the label is adhered constitutes the outer wall of the cartridge casing 130.
- the liquid storage chamber e.g.
- the first storage chamber 32 and the second storage chamber 33) in the ink cartridge 30 need not be visually recognized from the outside of the ink cartridge 30 in any direction.
- the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38 each have a region through which the surface level of the ink stored in the first storage chamber 32 can be recognized.
- the cartridge casing 130 may be covered with a cover, for example.
- the cover needs to be configured so as to expose a part of the front wall 40, a part of the rear wall 41, a part of the right side wall 37, and a part of the left side wall 38 to an outside.
- the cover may have four openings at positions opposing the part of the front wall 40, the part of the rear wall 41, the part of the right side wall 37, and the part of the left side wall 38, respectively. If this is the case, the parts of the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the right side wall 37, and the left side wall 38, those exposed to an outside through the openings, form the outer walls of the cartridge casing 130.
- the cartridge casing 130, the first inner lid 131, the second inner lid 132, the outer lid 134, and the support member 150 are assembled to provide the ink cartridge 30.
- the cartridge casing 130, the first inner lid 131, the second inner lid 132, the outer lid 134, and the support member 150 may be integrally formed.
- the cartridge casing 130 and the outer lid 134 may be integrally formed.
- the second inner lid 132 and the support member 150 may be integrally formed.
- contact between the lock shaft 145 and the lock surface 151 holds the ink cartridge 30 in the attached position.
- the ink cartridge 30 may not be held in the attached position by the contact between the lock shaft 145 and the lock surface 151. Any other known configuration may be employed to hold the ink cartridge 30 in the attached position.
- the semipermeable membrane 141 is welded to the lower end surface of the rib 140.
- the semipermeable membrane 141 may be welded at any other portion as long as the semipermeable membrane 141 is welded to a portion capable of preventing ink drawn into the air chamber 36 through the through-hole 46 from flowing into the labyrinth path 143.
- the semipermeable membrane 141 is welded.
- the semipermeable membrane 141 need not be welded.
- the two projections 180 provided at the cap 79 oppose each other in the left-right direction.
- the projections 180 may oppose each other in any direction other than the left-right direction.
- the projections 180 may oppose each other in the up-down direction.
- valve mechanism 135 is configured to interrupt communication between the first storage chamber 32 and the atmosphere by closing the through-hole 46 and to provide communication between the first storage chamber 32 and the atmosphere by opening the through-hole 46.
- valve mechanism 135 may be configured to open and close a portion of the air communication passage 72 other than the through-hole 46.
- valve mechanism 135 moves away from the through-hole 46 as the ink cartridge 30 is in the process of being moved upward (i.e. in a direction opposite to the gravitational direction) to engage the lock surface 151 with the lock shaft 145.
- the valve mechanism 135 may so move as the ink cartridge 30 is in the process of being moved in an attachment direction to the cartridge attachment section 110, that is, in a direction crossing the gravitational direction.
- the ink supply portion 34 is provided with the cylinder 75 and the cap 79 covering the cylinder 75.
- the ink supply portion 34 need not be provided with the cap 79.
- the guide grooves 175 may be formed in an outer circumferential surface of the cylinder 75.
- the opening in the front end of the cylinder 75 may be formed by piercing, with a needle or the like, a seal member formed of elastic resin and having no through-hole, and may be closed by the elasticity of the seal member as the needle is retracted from the seal member.
- the dimension in the front-rear direction of the main bottom wall portion 42 is greater than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48.
- the dimension in the front-rear direction of the main bottom wall portion 42 may be shorter than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48.
- the connecting wall 49 may be disposed at a front-rear center portion of the ink cartridge 30.
- the connecting wall 49 may be disposed at a position closer to the rear wall 41 than to the front wall 40.
- the ink cartridge 30 has the outer shape as illustrated in Figs. 4 and 5 . Further, the ink supply portion 34 extends frontward from the connecting wall 49 and positioned downward and rearward of the front wall 40. However, the ink cartridge 30 need not be so shaped and the ink supply portion 34 need not be so positioned as illustrated in Figs. 4 and 5 .
- the gap distance between the right side wall 37 and the left side wall 38 may be greater than the gap distance between the front wall 40 and the rear wall 41.
- the ink cartridge 30 may have a simple, rectangular outer shape.
- the ink supply portion 34 may extends frontward from the front wall 40.
- the ink supply portion 34 may extend downward from the main bottom wall portion 42 and may have a bent or curved distal end to allow the ink supply port 71 to open frontward.
- the plates 104 are arrayed in the left-right direction with a space being formed between neighboring plates 104 in the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the ink cartridge 30 is detachably attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 at a position between the neighboring plates 104.
- the neighboring plates 104 face the ink cartridge 30 in the left-right direction.
- the plates 104 extend both in the up-down direction and in the front-rear direction.
- the plates 104 have the same shape and the same size with one another.
- each plate 104 has a substantially C-shape that opens rearward when viewed in the left-right direction.
- the plate 104 has: a main part 1040 positioned at a front part of the internal space of the case 101 of the cartridge attachment section 110; a lower protruding part 1042 protruding from a lower end portion of the main part 1040 in the rearward direction 52; and an upper protruding part 1044 protruding from an upper end portion of the main part 1040 in the rearward direction 52.
- a gap or notched area 1046 is formed between the lower protruding part 1042 and the upper protruding part 1044 of the plate 104 in the up-down direction.
- a bottom end of the main part 1040 of the plate 104 is connected with the inner bottom surface of the case 101 of the cartridge attachment section 110.
- a top end of the main part 1040 of the plate 104 is connected with the inner top surface 57 of the case 101.
- the main part 1040 of the plate 104 extends over the entire length of the internal space of the case 101 in the up-down direction.
- a front end of the main part 1040 of the plate 104 is connected with the inner end surface 59 of the case 101.
- the main part 1040 of the plate 104 extends from the inner end surface 59 of the case 101 in the rearward direction 52 to such a length that at least part of the main part 1040 is overlapped, in the front-rear direction, with at least part of the ink supply portion 34 of the ink cartridge 30 when the ink cartridge 30 has been completely attached in the cartridge attachment section 110. More specifically, the main part 1040 extends in the front-rear direction such that part of the main part 1040 in the front-rear direction is disposed in a joint range JR that is defined in the cartridge attachment section 110. As shown in Fig.
- the joint range JR is defined in the front-rear direction as such a range, in which the ink supply portion 34 and the ink needle 102 are overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction when the ink supply portion 34 and the ink needle 102 have been connected with each other.
- the plate 104 is overlapped with a front part of the ink supply portion 34 when viewed in the left-right direction because the ink supply portion 34 is disposed at a vertical level between the upper and lower ends of the plate 104.
- a front end of the lower protruding part 1042 of the plate 104 is continuous with a lower rear end portion of the main part 1040 of the plate 104.
- a lower end of the lower protruding part 1042 of the plate 104 is connected with the inner bottom surface of the case 101.
- a rear end of the lower protruding part 1042 of the plate 104 is disposed at an open end of the opening 112 of the case 101.
- a front end of the upper protruding part 1044 of the plate 104 is continuous with the upper rear end portion of the main part 1040 of the plate 104.
- An upper end of the upper protruding part 1044 of the plate 104 is connected with the inner top surface 57 of the case 101.
- a rear end of the upper protruding part 1044 of the plate 104 is disposed at the open end of the opening 112 of the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the lower protruding part 1042 and the upper protruding part 1044 of the plate 104 have such vertical lengths that the gap or notched area 1046 is formed between the lower protruding part 1042 and the upper protruding part 1044 of the plate 104 in the up-down direction.
- the notched area 1046 is positioned rearward of the main part 1040 of the plate 104, and is in communication with the opening 112.
- the upper protruding part 1044 of the plate 104 has: an intermediate region 1044A in the front-rear direction; a rear region 1044B disposed rearward of the intermediate region 1044A; and a front region 1044C disposed frontward of the intermediate region 1044A.
- the intermediate region 1044A of the upper protruding part 1044 is overlapped, in the front-rear direction, with the position at which the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 on the ink cartridge 30 contact the contacts 106 in the cartridge attachment section 110 when the ink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the intermediate region 1044A of the upper protruding part 1044 is aligned with the contact positions, at which the electrodes 65 contact the contacts 106, in the up-down direction. It is noted that the electrodes 65 are not overlapped with the plate 104 when viewed in the left-right direction because the electrodes 65 are disposed at a vertical level higher than the upper end of the plate 104.
- the intermediate region 1044A is disposed in an electrode-extending range ER that is defined in the front-rear direction.
- the electrode-extending range ER is defined in the front-rear direction such that when the ink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to the cartridge attachment section 110, the electrodes 65 are disposed to extend in the electrode-extending range ER in the front-rear direction.
- the contact positions at which the electrodes 65 are in contact with the contacts 106 are therefore within the electrode-extending range ER in the front-rear direction.
- the front ends of the electrodes 65 are aligned with the front end of the intermediate region 1044A in the up-down direction
- the rear ends of the electrodes 65 are aligned with the rear end of the intermediate region 1044A in the up-down direction
- the contact positions between the electrodes 65 and the contacts 106 are aligned with a particular position in the intermediate region 1044A between the front and rear ends thereof.
- a distance of the front ends of the electrodes 65 from the distal end (rear end) of the ink needle 102 is equal to a distance of the front end of the intermediate region 1044A from the distal end of the ink needle 102
- a distance of the rear ends of the electrodes 65 from the distal end of the ink needle 102 is equal to a distance of the rear end of the intermediate region 1044A from the distal end of the ink needle 102
- a distance of the particular position of the intermediate region 1044A from the distal end of the ink needle 102 is equal to a distance from the distal end of the ink needle 102 to the contact position between the electrodes 65 and the contacts 106.
- the distal end of the ink needle 102 is disposed at the rear end of the joint range JR in the front-rear direction.
- the gap between the intermediate region 1044A of the upper protruding part 1044 and the lower protruding part 1042 has a length G1 in the up-down direction.
- the gap between the rear region 1044B of the upper protruding part 1044 and the lower protruding part 1042 has a length G2 in the up-down direction.
- the gap between the front region 1044C of the upper protruding part 1044 and the lower protruding part 1042 has a length G3 in the up-down direction.
- the length G1 is smaller than the length G2, and is greater than the length G3.
- the size of the notched area 1046 in the up-down direction increases as proceeding toward the opening 112 in the rearward direction 52.
- a cover 1050 is pivotally supported by a housing (not shown) of the printer 10 to open and close the opening 112. After the ink cartridge 30 is completely attached to the cartridge attachment section 110, the opening 112 is closed by the cover 1050 as indicated by a solid line in the figure. Accordingly, even when the printer 10 attached with the ink cartridge 30 is dropped onto the floor, the cover 1050 prevents the ink cartridge 30 from being detached from the printer 10.
- the ink cartridge 30 can be inserted into or removed from the cartridge attachment section 110 when the cover 1050 is open as indicated by a two dot and chain line in the figure.
- the ink supply portion 34 is positioned at the lower end portion of the ink cartridge 30, and the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 are positioned at the upper surface 39 of the ink cartridge 30.
- the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 are distant away from the ink supply portion 34 in the up-down direction. Hence, even when ink is scattered on the ink supply portion 34, the ink may not be deposited on the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64.
- the electrodes 65 on the IC board 64 are disposed further away from the ink supply portion 30, in comparison with the conventional structure in which the ink supply portion is positioned upward of the lower end portion of the ink cartridge as in the above-described Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-129178 . Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the ink supply portion 30 comes off the ink needle 102 and ink is scattered as a result of the impact, contamination of the electrodes 65 with the spilled ink is less likely than the comparative example.
- the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 are positioned upstream of the ink supply portion 34 in the insertion direction. That is, the electrodes 65 are positioned rearward of the ink supply portion 34. Accordingly, a length of a path from the ink supply portion 34 to the electrodes 65 is increased to further avoid adhesion of the scattered ink onto the electrodes 65.
- the cartridge casing 130 and the outer lid 134 have such a portion that is positioned above the ink supply portion 34 and protrudes further frontward relative to the front end of the ink supply portion 34. Accordingly, even when the printer 10 attached with the ink cartridge 30 therein is dropped on the floor and ink leaks from the front end of the ink supply portion 34, the portion of the ink cartridge that is disposed upward of the ink supply portion 34 and frontward of the front end of the ink supply portion 34 can receive ink leaking from the ink supply portion 34. Therefore, the electrodes 65 on the ink cartridge 30 can be suppressed from being contaminated by ink.
- the main part 1040 of the plate 104 fully extends in the entire vertical length of the inside of the case 101 of the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the main part 1040 of the plate 104 is overlapped with the joint range JR in the insertion direction (front-rear direction). Accordingly, the main part 1040 of the plate 104 enhances mechanical strength with respect to the connection between the ink supply portion 34 and the ink needle 102.
- the main part 1040 of the plate 104 can protect the connecting position between the ink supply portion 34 and the ink needle 102. Accordingly, even when the printer 10 is dropped on the floor, the main part 1040 of the plate 104 can moderate application of impacting force to the ink supply portion 34 and the ink needle 102, and therefore can avoid disengagement of the ink cartridge 30 from the printer 10.
- the intermediate region 1044A of the upper protruding part 1044 in the plate 104 is positioned at the electrode-extending range ER in the insertion direction (front-rear direction), and has a partial length relative to the entire length of the inside of the case 101 in the up-down direction. Accordingly, the upper protruding part 1044 of the plate 104 can ensure strength for protecting the contact position between the electrodes 65 and the contacts 106, thereby avoiding the electrodes 65 and the contacts 106 from being damaged.
- the plate 104 is formed with the notched area 1046 at the position below the upper protruding part 1044.
- the dimension of the notched area 1046 in the vertical direction increases toward the opening 112. Accordingly, the user can easily access and hold by their fingers the left and right side walls 38, 37 of the ink cartridge 30 at their regions exposed through the notched areas 1046 of the plates 104 when inserting or removing the ink cartridge 30 relative to the cartridge attachment section 110. Hence, the ink cartridge 30 can be easily attached to and detached from the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the ink supply portion 34 and the electrodes 65 can be protected against impacting force due to falling, and also user's operability for inserting and removing the ink cartridge 30 can be ensured.
- the plate 104 can restrain fracture of the ink supply portion 34 and the ink needle 102, and can protect against damage to the electrodes 65 and the contacts 106 due to impacting force transmitted.
- the plate 104 can also ensure user's operability for inserting and removing the ink cartridge 30 to and from the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the electrodes 65 are distant away from the ink supply portion 34, even when the ink cartridge 30 is disengaged from the ink supply portion 34 by the application of impacting force due to dropping of the printer 30, ink adhesion to the electrodes 65 can be restrained against scattering of the ink from the ink supply portion 34.
- the plates 104 can suppress the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 on the ink cartridge 30 from being contaminated by ink leaking out of neighboring ink cartridges 30.
- the lock surface 151 which is positioned rearward of the electrodes 65 on the top wall 39 of the ink cartridge 30, is engaged with the lock shaft 145 provided at the cartridge attachment section 110 as shown in Fig. 27B . Accordingly, even when the printer 10 attached with the ink cartridge 30 is accidentally dropped onto the floor, the engagement between the lock surface 151 and the lock shaft 145 can prevent the ink cartridge 30 from being detached from the cartridge attachment section 110.
- the ink cartridge 30 has the light-blocking plate 67 on the top wall 39 at a position frontward of the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is for being detected by the sensing light emitted from the optical sensor 113 shown in Fig. 27B . Because the electrodes 65 are disposed rearward of the light-blocking plate 67, the path of a large length is provided from the ink supply portion 34 to the electrodes 65 to avoid adhesion of scattered ink onto the electrodes 65.
- ink is exemplified as liquid.
- a pretreatment liquid that is ejected onto the recording paper prior to the ink during a printing operation may be stored in a liquid cartridge.
- water that is used for cleaning the recording head 21 may be stored in a liquid cartridge.
- the ink cartridge 30 described herein need not be a cartridge for storing ink. Instead, the ink cartridge 30 may be a cartridge for storing any liquid that the printer 10 consumes.
- the ink cartridge 30 is an example of a printing-fluid cartridge.
- the printer 10 is an example of a printing-fluid consuming device.
- the contacts 106 are an example of an electrical contact.
- the cartridge casing 130 and the outer lid 134 are an example of a cartridge body.
- the first storage chamber 32 and the second storage chamber 33 are an example of a storage chamber.
- the outer surface of the top wall 39 facing upward is an example of an upper surface.
- the ink supply portion 34 is an example of a supply portion.
- the electrodes 65 are an example of an electrical interface.
- the recording head 21 is an example of a printing-fluid consuming portion.
- the ink needle 102 is an example of a supply tube.
- the plate 104 is an example of a plate.
- the main part 1040 is an example of a main part.
- the lower protruding part 1042 is an example of a lower protruding part.
- the upper protruding part 1044 is an example of a upper protruding part.
- the intermediate region 1044A is an example of a first region.
- the rear region 1044B is an example of an second region.
- the front region 1044C is an example of a third region.
- the joint range JR is an example of a connecting position.
- a contact position between the electrodes 65 and the contacts 106 that is within the electrode-extending range ER in the front-rear direction is an example of a contact position.
- the left-right direction is an example of a widthwise direction.
- the opening 112 is an example of an insertion opening.
- the lock shaft 145 is an example of a lock portion.
- the optical sensor 113 is an example of a sensor.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is an example of a protrusion.
Landscapes
- Ink Jet (AREA)
Description
- The present disclosure relates to a system including a printing-fluid cartridge and a printing-fluid consuming device on which the printing-fluid cartridge is mountable.
- Conventionally, there have been known inkjet recording apparatuses configured to record images on recording mediums by ejecting ink stored in ink cartridges through nozzles. For example,
Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-129178 - A very similar printing fluid cartridge is disclosed by
EP 2 607 088 A2 , which shows the same drawbacks as the ink cartridge of the above-mentionedJapanese patent application, publication Nr. 2013129178 -
- [PTL 1]
Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-129178 - [PTL 2]
European Patent Application Publication No. 2 607 088 A2 - In case this printer is accidentally dropped onto a floor, the impact of the dropping may be imparted on the ink cartridge mounted in the printer. Due to the impact, the ink supply portion may be damaged and broken, and the electrodes of the IC board may be scratched or damaged. Further, if the ink supply portion comes off the ink needle due to the falling impact, ink stored in the ink cartridge may be scattered, resulting in contamination of the electrodes of the IC board.
- The impact from the fall imparted onto the mounted ink cartridge may be mitigated by guide plates provided in an internal space of the case of the printer. The guide plates partition the internal space of the case into a plurality of spaces each configured to accommodate the ink cartridge therein. However, conflicting relationship is found between improvement in rigidity of the case and operability of the ink cartridge at the time of insertion and removal. Specifically, an increase in dimension of the guide plates in an insertion direction of the ink cartridge can enhance rigidity of the case, but makes it difficult for a user to hold the side walls of the ink cartridge by fingers, thereby making user's insertion and removal of the ink cartridge difficult to perform. To the contrary, a decrease in dimension of the guide plates in the insertion direction of the ink cartridge can facilitate the user's insertion and removal of the ink cartridge relative to the case, but may lower rigidity of the case. As a result, the ink cartridge mounted in the case is susceptible to damages attributed to the impact from the fall of the printer.
- In view of the foregoing, it is an object of the present disclosure to provide a system including a printing-fluid cartridge and a printing-fluid consuming device that can prevent the supply portion and the electrical interface from being damaged when the system is accidentally dropped onto a floor and yet can also ensure improved operability in insertion and removal of the printing-fluid cartridge relative to the printing-fluid consuming device.
- (1) In order to attain above and other object, according to one aspect, the disclosure provides a system including: a printing-fluid cartridge; and a printing-fluid consuming device. The printing-fluid consuming device includes: a cartridge attachment section; and an electrical contact. The printing-fluid cartridge is attachable to the cartridge attachment section by insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge in an insertion direction. The electrical contact is provided at the cartridge attachment section. The printing-fluid cartridge includes: a cartridge body; a supply portion; and an electrical interface. The cartridge body has a storage chamber configured to store printing fluid. The cartridge body has a lower end portion and an upper surface. The supply portion is disposed at the lower end portion and configured to supply the printing-fluid stored in the storage chamber. The electrical interface is disposed at the upper surface and positioned upstream relative to the supply portion in the insertion direction. The electrical interface is configured to be in contact with the electrical contact by the insertion. The printing-fluid consuming device further includes: a printing-fluid consuming portion; a supply tube; and a plate. The supply tube is provided at the cartridge attachment section. The supply tube is connectable to the supply portion to allow the printing fluid stored in the storage chamber to flow therethrough toward the printing-fluid consuming portion. The plate is provided at the cartridge attachment section. The plate faces the printing-fluid cartridge in a widthwise direction perpendicular to both of the insertion direction and an up-down direction in an attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge where the supply portion and the supply tube are connected together. The plate has: a main part extending over an entire length of an inside of the cartridge attachment section in the up-down direction, the main part having a lower end portion and an upper end portion; a lower protruding part protruding from the lower end portion of the main part in an opposite direction opposite to the insertion direction; and an upper protruding part protruding from the upper end portion of the main part in the opposite direction, the upper protruding part being spaced away from the lower protruding part to provide a gap between the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part in the up-down direction. The main part of the plate and the supply portion are at least partly overlapped with each other when viewed in the widthwise direction in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge. The upper protruding part has a first region whose distance from an upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction is equal to a distance of the electrical interface from the upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction. The upper protruding part further has a second region positioned upstream relative to the first region in the insertion direction. A length of the gap between the lower protruding part and the first region of the upper protruding part being smaller than a length of the gap between the lower protruding part and the second region of the upper protruding part.
- According to the above-described configuration, the supply portion is disposed at the lower end portion of the cartridge body, the electrical interface is disposed at the upper surface of the cartridge body, and the electrical interface is disposed upstream of the supply portion in the insertion direction. A path of a relatively large length is provided from the supply portion to the electrical interface to avoid adhesion of scattered printing fluid onto the electrical interface.
- In addition, the plate has: the main part, at least part of which is overlapped with at least part of the supply portion of the attached cartridge when viewed in the widthwise direction; and the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part protruding from the lower and upper end portions of the main part, respectively, in the opposite direction such that a gap is formed between the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part in the up-down direction. The upper protruding part has: the first region whose distance from the upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction is equal to the distance of the electrical interface of the attached cartridge from the upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction; and the second region disposed upstream of the first region in the insertion direction. The main part extends over the entire length of the inside of the cartridge attachment section in the up-down direction. The lower protruding part and the upper protruding part have such sizes in the up-down direction that the length of the gap between the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part at the first region is smaller than that of the gap between the lower protruding part and the upper protruding part at the second region. With this configuration, the supply portion and the electrical interface can be protected against impacting force due to falling of the system, and also user's operability for inserting and removing the printing-fluid cartridge can be ensured.
- (2) It is preferable that in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge, the supply tube and the supply portion are connected together at a connecting position in the insertion direction, and that the main part of the plate is overlapped with the connecting position when viewed in the widthwise direction in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge.
- According to the above-described configuration, the main part of the plate can ensure protection of the connecting position between the supply tube and the supply portion.
- (3) It is preferable that in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge, the electrical interface is in contact with the electrical contact at a contact position, and that in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge, a distance of a portion in the first region of the upper protruding part from the upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction is equal to a distance of the contact position from the upstream end of the supply tube in the insertion direction.
- According to the above-described configuration, the upper protruding part of the plate can ensure protection of the contact position between the electrical interface and the electrical contact.
- (4) It is preferable that in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge, the upper protruding part of the plate further has a third region positioned downstream relative to the first region in the insertion direction, the length of the gap between the lower protruding part and the first region of the upper protruding part being greater than a length of the gap between the lower protruding part and the third region of the upper protruding part.
- With this configuration, the printing-fluid cartridge can be easily attached to and detached from the cartridge attachment section.
- (5) It is preferable that a plurality of the plates are provided in the cartridge attachment section so as to be arrayed in the widthwise direction with a space being formed between neighboring plates, the printing-fluid cartridge being attached to the cartridge attachment section at a position between the neighboring plates.
- Because the cartridge attachment section is partitioned by the plurality of plates, the plates can suppress the electrical interface of the printing-fluid cartridge from being contaminated by printing-liquid leaking out of a neighboring cartridge.
- (6) It is preferable that the cartridge body has a portion positioned upward relative to the supply portion and downstream relative to a downstream end of the supply portion in the insertion direction.
- If the printing-fluid cartridge were dropped, printing-fluid may leak from the supply portion. If this is the case, the portion of the cartridge body that is upward relative to the supply portion and downstream relative to the downstream end of the supply portion in the insertion direction can receive the printing fluid leaking from the supply portion. Therefore, the electrical interface of the printing-fluid cartridge can be suppressed from being contaminated by the printing fluid.
- (7) It is preferable that the cartridge attachment section has an upstream end in the insertion direction formed with an insertion opening, that the printing-fluid consuming device further includes a cover configured to open and close the insertion opening, and that the cover is closed in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge.
- Even when the system is accidentally dropped onto the floor, the closed cover can prevent the printing-fluid cartridge from being detached from the cartridge attachment section.
- (8) It is preferable that the printing-fluid consuming device further includes a lock portion provided at the cartridge attachment section, and that the cartridge body has a lock surface disposed at the upper surface, the lock surface being positioned upstream relative to the electrical interface in the insertion direction, the lock surface being configured to engage with the lock portion.
- Even when the system is accidentally dropped onto the floor, the engagement between the lock surface and the lock portion can prevent the printing-fluid cartridge from being detached from the cartridge attachment section.
- (9) It is preferable that the printing-fluid consuming device further includes a sensor provided at the cartridge attachment section and configured to emit a sensing light travelling in the widthwise direction, and that the printing-fluid cartridge further includes a protrusion disposed at the upper surface, the protrusion being positioned downstream relative to the electrical interface in the insertion direction, the protrusion having a detection surface configured to be detected by the sensor.
- Because the electrical interface is positioned upstream relative to the protrusion in the insertion direction, the path of a large length is provided from the supply portion to the electrical interface to avoid adhesion of scattered printing fluid onto the electrical interface.
- The present disclosure can protect the supply portion and the electrical interface against impacting force due to falling of the system, and can also ensure user's operability for inserting and removing the printing-fluid cartridge.
-
- [
fig.1]Fig. 1 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional diagram illustrating an internal structure of asystem 1 according to one embodiment having aprinter 10 provided with acartridge attachment section 110 and anink cartridge 30 detachably attached to thecartridge attachment section 110; - [
fig.2]Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 according to the embodiment as viewed from a rear side thereof; - [
fig.3]Fig. 3 is a vertical cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 and theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment, illustrating a state where theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110; - [
fig.4]Fig. 4 is a perspective view of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment as viewed from a front side thereof; - [
fig.5]Fig. 5 is a perspective view of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment as viewed from a rear side thereof; - [
fig.6]Fig. 6 is a left side view of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment; - [
fig.7]Fig. 7 is an exploded perspective view of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment; - [
fig.8A]Fig. 8A is a perspective view of a firstinner lid 131 of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment as viewed from a bottom side thereof; - [
fig.8B]Fig. 8B is a perspective view of the firstinner lid 131 as viewed from a top side thereof; - [
fig.9A]Fig. 9A is a perspective view of a secondinner lid 132 of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment as viewed from a bottom side thereof; - [
fig.9B]Fig. 9B is a perspective view of the secondinner lid 132 as viewed from a top side thereof; - [
fig.9C]Fig. 9C is a cross-sectional view of alabyrinth path 143 formed in the secondinner lid 132 taken along a line C-C inFig. 9B ; - [
fig. 10]Fig. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment; - [
fig.11]Fig. 11 is a cross-sectional view of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment taken along a line XI-XI inFig. 6 ; - [
fig. 12]Fig. 12 is an exploded perspective view of anink supply portion 34 of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment as viewed from a front side thereof; - [
fig. 13A]Fig. 13A is a perspective view of acap 79 of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment as viewed from a rear side thereof; - [
fig. 13B]Fig. 13B is a perspective view of thecap 79 as viewed from a front side thereof; - [
fig. 14]Fig. 14 is a cross-sectional view of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment taken along a line XIV-XIV inFig. 6 ; - [
fig. 15]Fig. 15 is a vertical cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 and a left side view of theink cartridge 30 during an attachment process of theink cartridge 30 to thecartridge attachment section 110 according to the embodiment; - [
fig. 16]Fig. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 and theink cartridge 30 during the attachment process of theink cartridge 30 to thecartridge attachment section 110 according to the embodiment; - [
fig. 17]Fig. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 and theink cartridge 30 during the attachment process of theink cartridge 30 to thecartridge attachment section 110 according to the embodiment, illustrating a state where theink supply portion 34 has been connected to anink needle 102 but avalve body 161 has not yet been moved to its open position; - [
fig. 18]Fig. 18 is a vertical cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 and a left side view of theink cartridge 30 during the attachment process of theink cartridge 30 to thecartridge attachment section 110 according to the embodiment, illustrating a state where theink cartridge 30 has been pivotally moved within thecartridge attachment section 110; - [
fig. 19]Fig. 19 is a vertical cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 and theink cartridge 30 during the attachment process of theink cartridge 30 to thecartridge attachment section 110 according to the embodiment, illustrating a state where theink cartridge 30 has been pivotally moved within thecartridge attachment section 110 according to the embodiment; - [
fig.20]Fig. 20 is a vertical cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 and a left side view of theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment, illustrating a state where theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110; - [
fig.21]Fig. 21 is a vertical cross-sectional view of theink cartridge 30 illustrating a variation of thecartridge casing 130; - [
fig.22]Fig. 22 is a left side view of theink cartridge 30 illustrating a variation of the light-blockingplate 67; - [
fig.23]Fig. 23 is a perspective view of anink cartridge 30K, in which black ink is stored, according to one variation of theink cartridge 30 as viewed from a front side thereof; - [
fig.24]Fig. 24 is a cross-sectional view of theink cartridge 30K according to the variation taken along a line XXIV-XXIV inFig. 23 ; - [
fig.25]Fig. 25 is a cross-sectional view of theink cartridge 30K according to the variation taken along a line XXV-XXV inFig. 23 ; - [
fig.26A]Fig. 26A is a bottom view of a firstinner lid 1131 according to a first variation of the firstinner lid 131; - [
fig.26B]Fig. 26B is a bottom view of a firstinner lid 2131 according to a second variation of the firstinner lid 131; - [
fig.26C]Fig. 26C is a bottom view of a firstinner lid 3131 according to a third variation of the firstinner lid 131; - [
fig.27A]Fig. 27A is a vertical cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 and a left side view of theplate 140 according to the embodiment, illustrating a state where theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110; - [
fig.27B]Fig. 27B is a vertical cross-sectional view of thecartridge attachment section 110 and theink cartridge 30, illustrating a joint range JR and an electrode-extending range ER in the front-rear direction in the state where theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110; and - [
fig.28]Fig. 28 is a partial perspective view of a rear part of thecartridge attachment section 110 that is cut along a plane XXVIII - XXVIII shown inFig. 27A . - A
system 1 according to one embodiment and including anink cartridge 30 and aprinter 10 to which theink cartridge 30 is detachably attachable will be described with reference toFigs. 1 through 28 , wherein like parts and components are designated by the same reference numerals to avoid duplicating description. In the embodiment, a combination of theink cartridge 30 and theprinter 10 constitutes thesystem 1. - In the following description, a direction in which the
ink cartridge 30 is inserted into acartridge attachment section 110 of theprinter 10 is defined as a "frontward direction 51," while a direction in which theink cartridge 30 is removed from thecartridge attachment section 110 is defined as a "rearward direction 52." Thefrontward direction 51 and therearward direction 52 are opposite to each other. As will be described later, theink cartridge 30 is inserted into and removed from thecartridge attachment section 110 in a horizontal direction. Both thefrontward direction 51 and therearward direction 52 are therefore regarded as directions parallel to the horizontal direction. However, thefrontward direction 51 and therearward direction 52 need not be parallel to the horizontal direction. Further, a direction perpendicular to thefrontward direction 51 or therearward direction 52 is defined as a "downward direction 53." A direction opposite to thedownward direction 53 is defined as an "upward direction 54." A direction perpendicular to thefrontward direction 51 and thedownward direction 53 is defined as a "rightward direction 55." A direction opposite to therightward direction 55 is defined as a "leftward direction 56." Therightward direction 55 and theleftward direction 56 are also parallel to the horizontal direction. Therightward direction 55 and theleftward direction 56 need not be parallel to the horizontal direction. - Hence, in a state where the
ink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, that is, in a state where theink cartridge 30 is capable of being used or operated by theprinter 10, thedownward direction 53 is coincident with a direction of a gravitational force acting on the ink cartridge 30 (i.e. gravitational direction), and theupward direction 54 is coincident with a direction opposite to the gravitational direction. Therefore, in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 and capable of being used by theprinter 10, an outer surface of a main bottom wall portion 42 (described later) of a cartridge casing 130 (described later) faces downward, that is, faces in the gravitational direction. Further, at this state, thefrontward direction 51 and therearward direction 52 are perpendicular to the gravitational direction. - Further, the
rightward direction 55 and theleftward direction 56 are defined as directions perpendicular to thefrontward direction 51 and thedownward direction 53. More specifically, in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 and is capable of being used by theprinter 10, therightward direction 55 is a direction toward the right and theleftward direction 56 is a direction toward the left when theink cartridge 30 is viewed from a rear side thereof. - Note that a state where the
ink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 or a state where theink cartridge 30 is capable of being operated by theprinter 10 implies a state of theink cartridge 30 when theink cartridge 30 has been completely inserted into an attachment position in thecartridge attachment section 110. At the attachment position, anink needle 102 provided at thecartridge attachment section 110 is inserted into anink supply portion 34 of theink cartridge 30 to be coupled to theink supply portion 34, and an IC board 64 (described later) provided at theink cartridge 30 is in contact with contacts 106 (described later) provided at thecartridge attachment section 110. Hereinafter, a posture of theink cartridge 30 in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 or a state where theink cartridge 30 is capable of being operated by theprinter 10 will be referred to as an "operational posture." The operational posture of theink cartridge 30 will also be referred to as an "upright posture." - Further, the
frontward direction 51 and therearward direction 52 may be collectively referred to as a "front-rear direction." Theupward direction 54 and thedownward direction 53 may be collectively referred to as an "up-down direction." Therightward direction 55 and theleftward direction 56 may be collectively referred to as a "left-right direction." - Further, in the following description, an expression "facing frontward" means "facing in a direction containing a frontward component, an expression "facing rearward" means "facing in a direction containing a rearward component." Further, an expression "facing downward" means "facing in a direction containing a downward component," and an expression "facing upward" means "facing in a direction containing an upward component." For example, a phrase "A front surface faces frontward." denotes that the front surface may face in the frontward direction, or the front surface may face in a direction inclined relative to the frontward direction as long as the direction contains a frontward component.
- As illustrated in
Fig. 1 , theprinter 10 is an image recording apparatus configured to selectively eject ink droplets onto recording sheets to record images thereon based on an inkjet recording system. Theprinter 10 is, for example, an inkjet printer. Theprinter 10 includes arecording head 21, anink supplying device 100, andink tubes 20 connecting therecording head 21 to theink supplying device 100. Theink supplying device 100 includes thecartridge attachment section 110. Thecartridge attachment section 110 can detachably accommodate a plurality ofink cartridges 30. Thecartridge attachment section 110 has anopening 112 in one side thereof. Through theopening 112, each of theink cartridges 30 can be inserted into thecartridge attachment section 110 in thefrontward direction 51 and removed from thecartridge attachment section 110 in therearward direction 52. In the embodiment, fourink cartridges 30 corresponding to respective four colors of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black can be accommodated in thecartridge attachment section 110 of theink supply device 100. For an explanatory purpose, in the following description and the drawings, only oneink cartridge 30 is assumed to be attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 unless otherwise specified. - The
ink cartridge 30 stores liquid therein. Specifically, theink cartridge 30 stores ink therein that can be used for printing operations performed in theprinter 10. When theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, theink cartridge 30 is connected to therecording head 21 through the correspondingink tube 20. Therecording head 21 has a plurality of (four in the embodiment)damper chambers 28 corresponding to the plurality ofink cartridges 30. Eachdamper chamber 28 is adapted to temporarily store the ink supplied from the correspondingink cartridge 30 through the correspondingink tube 20. Therecording head 21 also includes a plurality ofnozzles 29 through which the ink supplied from therespective damper chambers 28 is selectively ejected. More specifically, therecording head 21 is provided with a head control board (not illustrated), and a plurality ofpiezoelectric elements 29A corresponding one-on-one to the plurality ofnozzles 29. The head control board is configured to selectively apply drive voltages to the plurality ofpiezoelectric elements 29A to eject ink selectively from thenozzles 29. In this way, therecording head 21 is configured to consume ink stored in eachink cartridge 30 that has been attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. - The
printer 10 includes asheet feeding tray 15, asheet feeding roller 23, a pair of conveyingrollers 25, aplaten 26, a pair ofdischarge rollers 27, and asheet discharge tray 16. Thesheet feeding roller 23 feeds recording sheets from thesheet feeding tray 15 onto a conveyingpath 24. The recording sheets conveyed to the conveyingpath 24 are then received by the pair of conveyingrollers 25. The pair of conveyingrollers 25 conveys the recording sheets over theplaten 26. Therecording head 21 selectively ejects ink onto the recording sheets as the recording sheets passes over theplaten 26, whereby images are recorded on the recording sheets. The pair ofdischarge rollers 27 receives the recording sheets that have passed over theplaten 26 and discharges the recoding sheets onto thesheet discharge tray 16 provided at a position most downstream in the conveyingpath 24. - As illustrated in
Fig. 1 , theink supplying device 100 is provided in theprinter 10. Theink supplying device 100 is configured to supply ink to therecording head 21. Theink supplying device 100 includes thecartridge attachment section 110, a plurality of (four in the embodiment)tanks 103, and the plurality of (four in the embodiment)ink tubes 20. Theink cartridges 30 are detachably attachable to thecartridge attachment section 110. Note thatFig. 1 illustrates a state where theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. That is, inFig. 1 , theink cartridge 30 is its attached state where theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. In other words, theink cartridge 30 illustrated inFig. 1 is in its operational posture described above. - As illustrated in
Figs. 1 to 3 , thecartridge attachment section 110 includes acase 101, a plurality of (four in the embodiment) ink needles 102, a plurality of (four in the embodiment)projection plates 111, a plurality of (four in the embodiment)optical sensors 113, and a plurality of sets (four sets in the embodiment) ofcontacts 106. As described above, four types ofink cartridges 30 corresponding to four colors of ink, i.e. cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, are detachably mountable in thecartridge attachment section 110. The fourink needles 102, the fourprojection plates 111, and the fouroptical sensors 113 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the fourink cartridges 30. Fourcontacts 106 are provided for oneink cartridge 30. Accordingly, four sets of fourcontacts 106, that is, a total of 16 (sixteen)contacts 106 are provided for the fourink cartridges 30. The fourtanks 103 and the fourink tubes 20 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the fourink cartridges 30. - As illustrated in
Fig. 2 , thecase 101 constitutes a housing of thecartridge attachment section 110. Thecase 101 has a generally box-like shape defining an internal space. Thecase 101 has an innertop surface 57, an inner bottom surface, an inner right-side surface 107, an inner left-side surface 108, aninner end surface 59, and theopening 112. The innertop surface 57 defines the top of the internal space of thecase 101. The inner bottom surface defines the bottom of the internal space of thecase 101. The inner right-side surface 107 defines the right of the internal space of thecase 101. The inner left-side surface 108 defines the left of the internal space of thecase 101. Theinner end surface 59 connects the innertop surface 57, the inner bottom surface, the inner right-side surface 107, and the inner left-side surface 108. Theopening 112 is formed in thecase 101 at a position facing theinner end surface 59 in the front-rear direction. Theopening 112 can be exposed to a user-interface surface of theprinter 10 that a user can face when operating theprinter 10. - Each
ink cartridge 30 can be inserted into and removed from thecase 101 through theopening 112. Thecase 101 has a bottom portion formed with a plurality of (four in the embodiment) guidegrooves 109 for guiding insertion and removal of theink cartridges 30 relative to thecase 101. Movements of therespective ink cartridges 30 in the front-rear direction (i.e., inFig. 2 , a direction perpendicular to a sheet surface) are guided by thecorresponding guide grooves 109 as lower end portions of theink cartridges 30 are inserted into thecorresponding guide grooves 109. Thecase 101 has three plates 104 (Fig. 2 ) that partition the internal space into four individual spaces each elongated in the up-down direction. Each of the four spaces partitioned by theplates 104 can receive corresponding one of the fourink cartridges 30. - As illustrated in
Figs. 2 and3 , eachink needle 102 has a hollow tubular shape and is disposed at a lower end portion of an end wall (i.e. a wall having the inner end surface 59) of thecase 101. At the end wall of thecase 101, the ink needles 102 are arranged at positions corresponding to the correspondingink supply portions 34 of theink cartridges 30 accommodated in thecartridge attachment section 110. Eachink needle 102 protrudes rearward from theinner end surface 59 of thecase 101 and is open at its distal end (i.e. rear end). Incidentally, eachink needle 102 may have a flat-shaped tip or a pointed tip. - As illustrated in
Fig. 2 , a plurality ofprojections 105 are formed on the inner right-side surface 107, the inner left-side surface 108, and theplates 104 of thecase 101. Theprojections 105 are provided at thecase 101 in the vicinity of the ink needles 102. In this embodiment, fourprojections 105 are provided for eachink needle 102. More specifically, when viewed in an insertion direction that theink cartridge 30 is inserted into the cartridge attachment section 110 (i.e. frontward direction 51), the fourprojections 105 are respectively positioned at an upper-right side, an upper-left side, a lower-right side and a lower-left side relative to eachink needle 102. Specifically, the fourprojections 105 include aprojection 105A, aprojection 105B, aprojection 105C, and aprojection 105D. Theprojection 105A is disposed at the upper-right side relative to theink needle 102. Theprojection 105B is disposed at the upper-left side relative to theink needle 102. Theprojection 105C is disposed at the lower-right side relative to theink needle 102. Theprojection 105D is disposed at the lower-left side relative to theink needle 102. Hereinafter, the fourprojections projections 105." As illustrated inFig. 15 , theprojections 105 extend in the front-rear direction. - Each
projection 105 has afirst guide surface 196 and asecond guide surface 197. InFig. 2 , for the sake of simplicity,reference signs projections case 101. - The
first guide surface 196 is a plane extending in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. Thesecond guide surface 197 is a plane extending in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction. Thesecond guide surface 197 is connected to thefirst guide surface 196. Incidentally, thefirst guide surface 196 and thesecond guide surface 197 need not be connected to each other. - The
first guide surface 196 of theprojection 105A and thefirst guide surface 196 of theprojection 105C oppose each other and are spaced apart from each other in the up-down direction. Thefirst guide surface 196 of theprojection 105B and thefirst guide surface 196 of theprojection 105D oppose each other and are spaced apart from each other in the up-down direction. Thesecond guide surface 197 of theprojection 105A and thesecond guide surface 197 of theprojection 105B oppose each other and spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction. Thesecond guide surface 197 of theprojection 105C and thesecond guide surface 197 of theprojection 105D oppose each other and are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction. - Note that the
projections 105 need not be positioned at the upper-right side, the upper-left side, the lower-right side, and the lower-left side relative to eachink needle 102. Theprojections 105 may be positioned at a left side, a right side, an upper side, and a lower side relative to eachink needle 102. Further, three orless projections 105, or five ormore projections 105 may be provided for eachink needle 102. - As illustrated in
Fig. 3 , aprojection plate 111 is provided in each of the four spaces of thecase 101 in which one of the fourink cartridges 30 can be accommodated. Accordingly, fourprojection plates 111 are provided at thecase 101, with one in each of the four cartridge-accommodating spaces. Specifically, theprojection plates 111 each protrude, in the respective cartridge-accommodating spaces, downward from the innertop surface 57 of thecase 101 at positions near theopening 112. Eachprojection plate 111 has a dimension in the left-right direction smaller than a gap distance between a pair ofwalls 114 constituting a protruding portion 43 (seeFig. 4 , described later) of theink cartridge 30. Further, theprojection plate 111 is located between the pair ofwalls 114 in the left-right direction when theink cartridge 30 has been inserted into thecartridge attachment section 110. During the insertion process of theink cartridge 30 into thecartridge attachment section 110, theprojection plate 111 advances into a space between the pair ofwalls 114 of the protrudingportion 43 of theink cartridge 30. When theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, theprojection plate 111 is positioned between the pair ofwalls 114 in the left-right direction, as illustrated inFig. 3 . Theprojection plate 111 has abottom surface 111A capable of abutting against alever 163 of a valve mechanism 135 (seeFig 3 , described later). - As illustrated in
Fig. 3 , a set of the four contacts 106 (only one contact is shown inFig. 3 ) is disposed in each of the four cartridge-accommodating spaces of thecase 101. Specifically, the set of the fourcontacts 106 is disposed on the innertop surface 57, in each cartridge-accommodating space of thecase 101, at a position frontward of theprojection plate 111. The set of the fourcontacts 106 protrudes downward from the innertop surface 57 into the cartridge-accommodating space of thecase 101. The fourcontacts 106 are arranged spaced apart from one another in the left-right direction, although not illustrated in the drawings in detail. The fourcontacts 106 in each set are arranged at positions respectively corresponding to four electrodes 65 (described later, seeFig. 4 ) provided at each of theink cartridges 30. Eachcontact 106 is formed of a material having electrical conductivity and resiliency. Thecontacts 106 can thus be resiliently deformable upward. In the embodiment, four sets of the fourcontacts 106 are provided each set for each of the fourink cartridges 30 that can be accommodated in thecase 101. Hence, a total of 16 (sixteen)contacts 106 are provided at thecase 101. However, thecontacts 106 and theelectrodes 65 may be provided in any number desired. - Each of the
contacts 106 is electrically connected to an arithmetic unit (not illustrated) of theprinter 10 via an electric circuit. The arithmetic unit may include a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, for example. The arithmetic unit may function as, for example, a controller of theprinter 10. When contacting the corresponding fourelectrodes 65, the fourcontacts 106 are electrically connected thereto, respectively. As a result, a voltage Vc is applied to one of the fourelectrodes 65; another of the fourelectrodes 65 is grounded; a signal indicative of data is transmitted to another of the fourelectrodes 65, and a synchronization signal is transmitted from the arithmetic unit to the other of the fourelectrodes 65. Once thecontacts 106 have been electrically connected to the correspondingelectrodes 65, respectively, the arithmetic unit can access data stored in an IC of theink cartridge 30. Output from each of thecontacts 106 via the electric circuit is inputted into the arithmetic unit. - As illustrated in
Fig. 2 , the fouroptical sensors 113 are disposed on the innertop surface 57 of thecase 101. Specifically, each of theoptical sensors 113 is disposed, in each cartridge-accommodating space of thecase 101, at a position frontward of the set of the fourcontacts 106. Each of theoptical sensors 113 includes a light emitter and a light receiver. The light emitter and the light receiver oppose each other in the left-right direction. Specifically, the light emitter is located leftward or rightward of the light receiver with a space therebetween. When theink cartridge 30 has been attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, a light-blocking plate 67 (described later, seeFigs. 2 and4 ) of the attachedink cartridge 30 is positioned between the light emitter and the light receiver of the correspondingoptical sensor 113. In other words, the light emitter and the light receiver of theoptical sensor 113 are arranged at positions opposing each other such that the light-blockingplate 67 of theink cartridge 30 attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 is positioned between the light emitter and the light receiver. - Each
optical sensor 113 is adapted to output different detection signals depending on whether or not the light receiver has received light emitted in the left-right direction from the light emitter. For example, theoptical sensor 113 outputs a low-level signal when the light receiver fails to receive the light emitted from the light emitter (that is, when an intensity of the light received by the light receiver is smaller than a prescribed value). On the other hand, theoptical sensor 113 outputs a high-level signal when the light receiver receives the light emitted from the light emitter (that is, when the intensity of the received light is equal to or greater than the prescribe value). - As illustrated in
Fig. 3 , alock shaft 145 is provided at thecase 101. Thelock shaft 145 extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the innertop surface 57 and theopening 112 of thecase 101. Thelock shaft 145 is a rod-like member extending in the left-right direction. Thelock shaft 145 is formed of metal and has a columnar shape, for example. Thelock shaft 145 has left and right end portions fixed to walls defining left and right ends of thecase 101. Hence, thelock shaft 145 is immovable, for example, not pivotable, relative to thecase 101. Thelock shaft 145 extends in the left-right direction, spanning the four cartridge-accommodating spaces of thecase 101 each in which theink cartridge 30 can be accommodated. In each of the cartridge-accommodating spaces, a space exists around thelock shaft 145. A lock surface 151 (described later) of eachink cartridge 30 can therefore access thelock shaft 145 by moving upward or rearward. - Here, the term "access" may imply either a physical access or contact (such as, contact that the
lock shaft 145 contacts the lock surface 151), or an optical access (such as, exposure of the light-blocking plate 67 (described later) to light emitted from the optical sensor 113). Alternatively, the term "access" may imply an electrical access (such as, establishment of electrical connection between theelectrodes 65 of the IC board 64 (described later) and thecontacts 106 to allow a current to flow therebetween when thecontacts 106 contact theelectrodes 65. Further, the access may be achieved in the up-down direction or in the left-right direction. The access may alternatively be achieved in the front-rear direction. - The
lock shaft 145 is adapted to retain theink cartridge 30 attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 at the attachment position. Theink cartridge 30 is brought into engagement with thelock shaft 145 when theink cartridge 30 is inserted into thecartridge attachment section 110 and pivotally moved to the operational posture. Further, thelock shaft 145 retains theink cartridge 30 at the attachment position in thecartridge attachment section 110 against an urging force of a coil spring 78 (seeFig. 3 ) of theink cartridge 30 that pushes theink cartridge 30 rearward. - As illustrated in
Fig. 1 , eachtank 103 is provided at a position frontward of thecase 101. Thetank 103 has a box-like shape that allows ink to be stored therein. Thetank 103 has anatmosphere communication port 124 at its top portion. Through theatmosphere communication port 124, thetank 103 opens to an outside. That is, an inner space of thetank 103 is open to an atmosphere through theatmosphere communication port 124. At a rear portion of thetank 103, the inner space of thetank 103 communicates with the inner space of theink needle 102. Hence, ink flowing out from theink cartridge 30 through the correspondingink needle 102 is stored in thecorresponding tank 103. Fourink tubes 20 are connected to the fourtanks 103, respectively. The ink stored in the inner space of eachtank 103 is thus supplied to therecording head 21 through the correspondingink tube 20. - The
ink cartridge 30 is a container for storing liquid, such as ink, therein. As described above, in the embodiment, fourink cartridges 30 corresponding to respective four colors of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black can be attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. Of the fourink cartridges 30, threeink cartridges 30 respectively corresponding to three colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow are identical in structure as illustrated inFig. 4 . Theink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black differs in structure from the other threeink cartridges 30 in that the dimension in the left-right direction of theink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black is greater than that of theink cartridge 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow. Other than this difference, theink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black is substantially identical to the other threeink cartridges 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow. The composition of the ink stored in theink cartridge 30 is not particularly limited, but the ink may be pigment ink having a sedimentary component, for example. Alternatively, the ink may be dye ink. - First, the structure of the
ink cartridge 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow will be described in detail. With regard to the configuration of theink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black, only parts differing from those of theink cartridge 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow will be described later as a variation of theink cartridge 30. Note that hereinafter theink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black will also be referred to as anink cartridge 30K when it is necessary to distinguish between theink cartridge 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow and theink cartridge 30 corresponding to a color of black. - The posture of the
ink cartridge 30 illustrated inFigs. 4 to 6 is a posture of theink cartridge 30 when theink cartridge 30 is in the operational posture, that is, a posture of theink cartridge 30 in a state where theink cartridge 30 is capable of being used in theprinter 10. The posture of theink cartridge 30 illustrated inFigs. 4 to 6 is also referred to as the "upright posture." Theink cartridge 30 includes afront wall rear wall top wall 39, abottom wall right side wall left side wall - In the operational posture of the
ink cartridge 30, thefront wall Fig. 11 , thefront wall 40 includes an innercurved surface 117A and an outercurved surface 117B opposite to the innercurved surface 117A, and an innercurved surface 118A and an outercurved surface 118B opposite to the innercurved surface 118A. - In the operational posture of the
ink cartridge 30, therear wall ink cartridge 30, thetop wall 39 faces upward. Further, in the operational posture of theink cartridge 30, a front end of thetop wall 39 is connected to an upper end of thefront wall 82 and a rear end of thetop wall 39 is connected to an upper end of therear wall 83. That is, thetop wall 39 extends in the front-rear direction between thefront wall ink cartridge 30 and therear wall ink cartridge 30. - In the operational posture of the
ink cartridge 30, thebottom wall bottom wall front wall 40 and therear wall 41. In the embodiment, thebottom wall bottom wall portion 42 and a subordinatebottom wall portion 48. A connectingwall 49 connects the mainbottom wall portion 42 to thesubordinate bottom wall 48. In the operational posture, the connectingwall 49 faces frontward. In the operational posture of theink cartridge 30, a front end of thebottom wall 42, 48 (i.e. a front end of the subordinate bottom wall portion 48) is connected to a lower end of thefront wall 40. A rear end of thebottom wall 42, 48 (i.e. a rear end of the main bottom wall portion 42) is connected to a lower end of therear wall 41. The mainbottom wall portion 42 connects the lower end of therear wall 41 to a lower end of the connectingwall 49. The subordinatebottom wall portion 48 connects the lower end of thefront wall 40 to an upper end of the connectingwall 49. In the embodiment, as illustrated inFigs. 10 and14 , the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 includes an innercurved surface 115A and an outercurved surface 115B opposite to the innercurved surface 115A, an innercurved surface 116A and an outercurved surface 116B opposite to the innercurved surface 116A, and an innercurved surface 119A and an outercurved surface 119B opposite to the innercurved surface 119A. - When the
ink cartridge 30 is in the operational posture, theright side wall ink cartridge 30 is in the operational posture, theleft side wall - When the
ink cartridge 30 is in the operational posture, a direction from therear wall 41 toward thefront wall 40 coincides with thefrontward direction 51, and a direction from thefront wall 40 toward therear wall 41 coincides with therearward direction 52. Further, when theink cartridge 30 is in the operational posture, a direction from thetop wall 39 toward thebottom wall bottom wall top wall 39 coincides with theupward direction 54. Still further, when theink cartridge 30 is in the operational posture, a direction from theleft side wall 38 toward theright side wall 37 coincides with therightward direction 55, and a direction from theright side wall 37 toward theleft side wall 38 coincides with theleftward direction 56. When theink cartridge 30 is in the operational posture, thefrontward direction 51, therearward direction 52, and the front-rear direction coincide a longitudinal direction of theink cartridge 30; thedownward direction 53, theupward direction 54, and the up-down direction coincide a heightwise direction of theink cartridge 30; and therightward direction 55, theleftward direction 56, and the left-right direction coincide a widthwise direction of theink cartridge 30. - Moreover, when the
ink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, an outer surface (i.e. front surface) of thefront wall rear wall bottom wall top wall 39 faces upward, an outer surface (i.e. right surface) of theright side wall left side wall - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 to 6 , theink cartridge 30 has a generally flattened rectangular parallelepiped shape so that a dimension of theink cartridge 30 in the left-right direction is small, and a dimension of theink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction and a dimension of theink cartridge 30 in the front-rear direction are greater than the dimension of theink cartridge 30 in the left-right direction. - As illustrated in
Fig. 7 , theink cartridge 30 includes thecartridge casing 130, a firstinner lid 131, a secondinner lid 132, asemipermeable membrane 141, afilm 133, afilm 146, anouter lid 134, avalve mechanism 135, asupport member 150, and theink supply portion 34. - As illustrated in
Fig. 7 , thecartridge casing 130 has a generally box-like shape opening upward. That is, thecartridge casing 130 has anopening 95 at its top end. In the embodiment, thecartridge casing 130 is a container formed of resin. As illustrated inFig. 10 , afirst storage chamber 32 and asecond storage chamber 33 are formed inside thecartridge casing 130. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 to 7 , thecartridge casing 130 includes thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, theleft side wall 38, the mainbottom wall portion 42, the subordinatebottom wall portion 48, and the connectingwall 49. Thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, theleft side wall 38, the mainbottom wall portion 42, thesubordinate bottom wall 48, and the connectingwall 49 constitute outer walls of thecartridge casing 130. Therear wall 41 is spaced away from thefront wall 40 in the front-rear direction. Theleft side wall 38 faces theright side wall 37 in the left-right direction. A gap distance between thefront wall 40 and therear wall 41 is greater than a gap distance between theright side wall 37 and theleft side wall 38. Thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, theleft side wall 38, the subordinatebottom wall portion 48, and an inner bottom wall portion 45 (Fig. 10 , described later) define afirst storage chamber 32. - The connecting
wall 49 and thefront wall 40 constitute the front wall of thecartridge casing 130. - In the operational posture of the
ink cartridge 30, the front surface of thefront wall 40 is a surface of thecartridge casing 130 facing frontward, while the rear surface of therear wall 41 is a surface of thecartridge casing 130 facing rearward. The front surface of the connectingwall 49 is also a surface of thecartridge casing 130 facing frontward. Theright side wall 37 and theleft side wall 38 respectively extend in a direction that crosses thefront wall 40 and therear wall 41. Theright side wall 37 connects thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, the mainbottom wall portion 42, the subordinatebottom wall portion 48, and the connectingwall 49. Likewise, theleft side wall 38 connects thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, the mainbottom wall portion 42, the subordinatebottom wall portion 48, and the connectingwall 49. In the operational posture of theink cartridge 30, the outer surface of theright side wall 37 faces rightward while the outer surface of theleft side wall 38 faces leftward. - Of the outer walls of the
cartridge casing 130, at least thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37 and theleft side wall 38 are formed of a light transmissive material allowing visual recognition of the ink stored in thefirst storage chamber 32 and thesecond storage chamber 33 from an outside of thecartridge casing 130. For example, at least thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37 and theleft side wall 38 are made of resin, such as acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin, polypropylene, or the like, substantially without containing colorant. More specifically, through at least thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38, the color of the ink stored in thefirst storage chamber 32, the color of the ink stored in thesecond storage chamber 33, and the surface level of the ink stored in thefirst storage chamber 32 can be visually recognized. When no or little ink remains in thefirst storage chamber 32, anupper surface 45A (Fig. 10 ) of the inner bottom wall portion 45 (described later) can be visually recognized from an outside of theink cartridge 30 through thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38. The mainbottom wall portion 42 and the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 may also be formed of a light transmissive material. In other words, thecartridge casing 130 may be made of transparent or semi-transparent resin. In the embodiment, two storage chambers, that is, thefirst storage chamber 32 and thesecond storage chamber 33, constitute a liquid storage chamber of theink cartridge 30. Instead, theink cartridge 30 may have a liquid storage chamber constituted by one storage chamber. In this case, the innerbottom wall portion 45 may be dispensed with. - The
right side wall 37 and theleft side wall 38 extend in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. As illustrated inFig. 14 , theright side wall 37 slopes relative to the up-down direction so that its lower end is positioned further leftward than its upper end. Accordingly, aninner surface 37A of theright side wall 37 also slopes relative to the up-down direction so that its lower end is positioned further leftward than its upper end. Theleft side wall 38 slopes relative to the up-down direction so that its lower end is positioned further rightward than its upper end. Accordingly, aninner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38 also slopes relative to the up-down direction so that its lower end is positioned further rightward than its upper end. Hence, a gap distance in the left-right direction between theinner surface 37A and theinner surface 38A is gradually decreased in thedownward direction 53. In other words, a gap distance in the left-right direction between theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37 and theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38 at their lower ends is smaller than a gap distance in the left-right direction between theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37 and theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38 at their upper ends. As long as theinner surface 37A and theinner surface 38A slopes relative to the up-down direction, theright side wall 37 and theleft side wall 38 may not be sloped and extend in the up-down direction. Alternatively, theright side wall 37, theleft side wall 38, theinner surface 37A, and theinner surface 38A need not slope relative to the up-down direction. - As illustrated in
Fig. 6 , the mainbottom wall portion 42 slopes relative to the front-rear direction. Specifically, a bottom surface of the mainbottom wall portion 42 is a sloped surface that slopes relative to the front-rear direction so that its rear end is positioned further upward than its front end. The front end of the mainbottom wall portion 42 is positioned frontward relative to the lock surface 151 (described later). The rear end of the mainbottom wall portion 42 is connected to the lower end of therear wall 41. That is, the mainbottom wall portion 42 extends frontward from the lower end of therear wall 41. The subordinatebottom wall portion 48 is positioned upward and frontward relative to the mainbottom wall portion 42. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 to 7 , an upper end portion of each of thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37 and theleft side wall 38 has anengagement claw 88 protruding outward from thecartridge casing 130. Eachengagement claw 88 is engageable with anopening 86 formed in theouter lid 134. In the embodiment, each of theengagement claws 88 is provided at each of thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38. That is, oneengagement claw 88 is provided at each of thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38. However, more than oneengagement claw 88 may be provided at each of thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38. - The first
inner lid 131 illustrated inFigs. 8A and 8B is adapted to close theopening 95 formed in the top end of thecartridge casing 130. As illustrated inFigs. 8A and 8B , the firstinner lid 131 has a generally box-like shape, opening upward. The firstinner lid 131 includes abottom wall 136, aperipheral wall 137 upstanding from a peripheral edge of thebottom wall 136, and aflange wall 138 protruding outward from an outer peripheral surface of theperipheral wall 137. - The
bottom wall 136 has a through-hole 46 penetrating the thickness of thebottom wall 136 in the up-down direction. As illustrated inFig. 10 , the through-hole 46 is formed at a position rearward relative to a front-rear center in anair chamber 36 of an air communication passage 72 (described later). Anupper surface 136A of thebottom wall 136 slopes downward toward the through-hole 46. - The through-
hole 46 need not be formed at the position specified inFigs. 3 and10 . The through-hole 46 may be formed at a position frontward relative to the front-rear center in theair chamber 36. Further, theupper surface 136A need not be sloped as described above. - As illustrated in
Fig. 10 , the firstinner lid 131 is attached to thecartridge casing 130 through theopening 95 formed at the top end of thecartridge casing 130 from above and is disposed in an interior space of thecartridge casing 130. The firstinner lid 131 is supported by thecartridge casing 130 in the interior space of thecartridge casing 130. More specifically, in a state where the firstinner lid 131 is disposed in the interior space of thecartridge casing 130, alower surface 138A of theflange wall 138 at a front end portion of the firstinner lid 131 is supported by a steppedsurface 40B of thefront wall 40 of thecartridge casing 130. The steppedsurface 40B is formed at an upper end portion of an inner surface (i.e. rear surface) of thefront wall 40. Further, alower surface 138B of theflange wall 138 at a rear end portion of the firstinner lid 131 is supported by a steppedsurface 41B of therear wall 41 of thecartridge casing 130. The steppedsurface 41B is formed at an upper end portion of an inner surface (i.e. front surface) of therear wall 41. In a state where the firstinner lid 131 is supported to thecartridge casing 130, atop end face 137A of theperipheral wall 137 of the firstinner lid 131 and atop end face 130A of thecartridge casing 130 are positioned on the same imaginary plane that expands in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. - As illustrated in
Figs. 8A and 8B , the firstinner lid 131 further includes twofirst ribs 185 and twosecond ribs 186. Thefirst ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 are formed at alower surface 136B of thebottom wall 136. In other words, two sets of thefirst rib 185 and thesecond ribs 186 are provided at thelower surface 136B. Thefirst ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 serve as guides when attaching the firstinner lid 131 to thecartridge casing 130. Further, thefirst ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 provide rigidity to thecartridge casing 130 when the firstinner lid 131 is attached to thecartridge casing 130. - The
first ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 protrude downward from thelower surface 136B. Thefirst ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 each have a protruding length from thelower surface 136B the same as one another. In other words, each of the twofirst ribs 185 and the twosecond ribs 186 has a lower end at a position the same as one another with respect to the up-down direction. - The
first ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 extend along thelower surface 136B. The twofirst ribs 185 are arranged spaced apart from each other in the front-rear direction. The twosecond ribs 186 are arranged spaced apart from each other in the front-rear direction. Thefirst ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 are positioned frontward relative to the through-hole 46. Each of thefirst ribs 185 and corresponding one of thesecond ribs 186 are arranged opposite to each other and spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction. A gap formed between thefirst rib 185 and the correspondingsecond rib 186 can facilitate flow of ink when filling theink cartridge 30 with the ink. - Each of the
first ribs 185 has an extendingportion 185A and an incliningportion 185B. Similarly, each of thesecond ribs 186 has an extendingportion 186A and an incliningportion 186B. - In a state where the first
inner lid 131 is supported to thecartridge casing 130, the extendingportion 185A of eachfirst rib 185 is in contact with theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37 while the extendingportion 186A of eachsecond rib 186 is in contact with theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. Each extendingportion 185A extends leftward from its base end that contacts theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37. Each extendingportion 186A extends rightward from its base end that contacts theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. - The inclining
portion 185B extends from a distal end (i.e. left end) of the extendingportion 185A and inclines relative to the front-rear direction so that a left end of the incliningportion 185B is positioned further rearward than a right end of the incliningportion 185B. The incliningportion 186B extends from a distal end (i.e. right end) of the extendingportion 186A and inclines relative to the front-rear direction so that a right end of the incliningportion 186B is positioned further rearward than a left end of the incliningportion 186B. That is, the incliningportion 185B extends toward the through-hole 46 from the extendingportion 185A and inclines relative to the front-rear direction so that a distal end of the incliningportion 185B farthest from the extendingportion 185A is positioned closer to the through-hole 46 in the left-right direction than a base end of the incliningportion 185B connected to the extendingportion 185A to the through-hole 46. Similarly, the incliningportion 186B extends toward the through-hole 46 from the extendingportion 186A and inclines relative to the front-rear direction so that a distal end of the incliningportion 186B farthest from the extendingportion 186A is positioned closer to the through-hole 46 in the left-right direction than a base end of the incliningportion 186B connected to the extendingportion 186A. - The distal end (i.e. rear end) of the inclining
portion 185B of one of thefirst ribs 185 is positioned further rearward than the distal end (i.e. rear end) of the incliningportion 186B of corresponding one of thesecond ribs 186 that opposes the one of thefirst ribs 185 in the left-right direction. Likewise, the distal end (i.e. rear end) of the incliningportion 185B of the other of thefirst ribs 185 is positioned further rearward than the distal end (i.e. rear end) of the incliningportion 186B of corresponding one of thesecond ribs 186 that opposes the other of thefirst ribs 185 in the left-right direction. Hence, the distal end of the incliningportion 185B of eachfirst rib 185 is positioned closer to the through-hole 46 than the distal end of the incliningportion 186B of the correspondingsecond rib 186. - Incidentally, neither the number of the
first ribs 185 nor the number of thesecond ribs 186 is limited to two. Further, thefirst ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 may be formed rearward relative to the through-hole 46. Still further, the distal end of the incliningportion 186B of thesecond rib 186 may be positioned rearward relative to the distal end of the incliningportion 185B of the correspondingfirst rib 185. - As illustrated in
Figs. 9A and 9B , the secondinner lid 132 has a plate-like shape. - The second
inner lid 132 is attached to the firstinner lid 131 from above through a top opening of the firstinner lid 131 and is disposed in an interior space of the firstinner lid 131 defined by thebottom wall 136 and theperipheral wall 137. The secondinner lid 132 is supported by the firstinner lid 131 in the interior space of the firstinner lid 131. Specifically, in a state where the secondinner lid 132 is disposed in the interior space of the firstinner lid 131, alower surface 132B of the secondinner lid 132 is in contact with a steppedsurface 137B (seeFig. 8B ) of theperipheral wall 137 of the firstinner lid 131. The steppedsurface 137B is formed at an inner peripheral surface of theperipheral wall 137 and faces upward. Accordingly, thelower surface 132B contacts the steppedsurface 137B from above. - The second
inner lid 132 is provided with arib 149 at itsupper surface 132A. Therib 149 protrudes upward from a peripheral edge portion of theupper surface 132A. As illustrated inFig. 10 , the secondinner lid 132 is supported by the firstinner lid 131, and the firstinner lid 131 is supported by thecartridge casing 130. In this state, atop end face 149A of therib 149 of the secondinner lid 132, thetop end face 137A of theperipheral wall 137 of the firstinner lid 131, thetop end face 130A of thecartridge casing 130 are positioned on the same imaginary plane that expands in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction. - As illustrated in
Fig. 9 , the secondinner lid 132 has a through-hole 139. In a state where the secondinner lid 132 is supported to the firstinner lid 131, the through-hole 139 opposes the through-hole 46 of the firstinner lid 131 in the up-down direction and is positioned above the through-hole 46. In other words, in a state where the secondinner lid 132 is supported to the firstinner lid 131, the through-hole 139 is positioned in alignment with the through-hole 46 with respect to the up-down direction. - The second
inner lid 132 further includes arib 140 at thelower surface 132B. Therib 140 protrudes downward from thelower surface 132B. Therib 140 is positioned frontward relative to the through-hole 139. Therib 140 has a rectangular frame-like shape when the secondinner lid 132 is viewed from a bottom side thereof. The shape of therib 140 is not limited to a rectangular frame-like shape, provided that therib 140 has an enclosed shape when the secondinner lid 132 is viewed from a bottom side thereof. For example, therib 140 may have a circular shape when the secondinner lid 132 is viewed from a bottom side thereof. - The semipermeable membrane 141 (see
Fig. 7 ) is welded or melt-bonded to a lower end surface of therib 140. Thesemipermeable membrane 141 is a porous film having minute holes blocking the passage of ink but allowing the passage of air. Thesemipermeable membrane 141 is made of fluorine resin such as polytetrafluoro ethylene, polychlorotrifluoro ethylene, tetrafuloroethylene-hexafluoropropylene copolymer, tetrafuloroethylene-perfluoroalkyl vinyl ethyl copolymer, or tetrafluoroethylene-ethylene copolymer. - Since the
semipermeable membrane 141 is welded to the lower end surface of therib 140, therib 140, thelower surface 132B of the secondinner lid 132, and thesemipermeable membrane 141 define aspace 89. - The second
inner lid 132 also has a through-hole 142. The through-hole 142 has one open end (i.e. lower open end) formed in thelower surface 132B at a position inside therib 140 when the secondinner lid 132 is viewed from a bottom side thereof. In other words, the through-hole 142 is formed in the secondinner lid 132 such that the one open end of the through-hole 142 is positioned in a portion of thelower surface 132B providing thespace 89. That is, the through-hole 142 is in communication with thespace 89. Hence, the through-hole 142 and thesemipermeable membrane 141 oppose each other in the up-down direction, with thespace 89 interposed therebetween in the up-down direction. The through-hole 142 is formed at a position frontward relative to the front-rear center of theair chamber 36 of theair communication passage 72. The through-hole 142 is positioned at a right-front end portion in a region surrounded by therib 140. - Incidentally, the through-
hole 142 need not be formed at the position specified inFig. 9 . For example, the through-hole 142 may be formed at a position rearward relative to the front-rear center of theair chamber 36. Alternatively, the through-hole 142 may be positioned at a left-front end portion or a rear end portion in the region surrounded by therib 140. - The second
inner lid 132 also has alabyrinth path 143 at theupper surface 132A, as illustrated inFigs. 9B and9C . Thelabyrinth path 143 is defined by theupper surface 132A, a plurality ofribs 144 provided at theupper surface 132A, and the film 146 (seeFig. 7 ) welded to upper end faces of theribs 144. - The plurality of
ribs 144 extends in the front-rear direction and is juxtaposed with each other in the left-right direction. Hence, thelabyrinth path 143 is a continuous passage that extends from the right to the left, repeatedly U-tuming in the front-rear direction. Thelabyrinth path 143 may not have the shape as illustrated inFig. 9B . For example, thelabyrinth path 143 may be a continuous passage that extends in the front-rear direction, repeatedly U-turning in the left-right direction. - The
labyrinth path 143 has one end that is in communication with the through-hole 142 and the other end that is in communication with acommunication hole 147. - The
communication hole 147 is a circular hole that opens upward. Thecommunication hole 147 is defined by theupper surface 132A and arib 148. Therib 148 has a hollow cylindrical shape and protrudes upward from theupper surface 132A. Therib 148 is connected to theribs 144. Hence, therib 148 is connected to thelabyrinth path 143. In other words, thecommunication hole 147 is in communication with thelabyrinth path 143. Thefilm 133 and thefilm 146 are formed of a material that is impermeable to liquid and air. Neither thefilm 146 nor the film 133 (seeFig. 7 ) is welded to an upper end face of therib 148. Thecommunication hole 147 thus opens upward and in communication with the atmosphere. Thecommunication hole 147 constitutes an end of theair communication passage 72. - The
communication hole 147 has an area when thecommunication hole 147 is viewed from above. This area of thecommunication hole 147 is greater than a cross-sectional area of thelabyrinth path 143 taken along a plane perpendicular to an air flowing direction, that is, a cross-sectional area of thelabyrinth path 143 taken along a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction illustrated inFig. 9C . In the embodiment, the area of thecommunication hole 147 is in a range from 3.1 square millimeters to 23.7 square millimeters while the cross-sectional arear of thelabyrinth path 143 is in a range from 0.8 square millimeters to 1.0 square millimeter, for example. - Incidentally, the
communication hole 147 is not limited to a circular hole. Further, thecommunication hole 147 may face in any directions other than theupward direction 54. - Further, the second
inner lid 132 has arib 156, a pair ofribs 157, and a pair ofribs 158 at theupper surface 132A around the through-hole 139. - The
rib 156 protrudes from theupper surface 132A along a peripheral edge of the through-hole 139. Therib 156 has a hollow cylindrical shape. Therib 156 is adapted to fix the position of arod 165 of avalve body 161 of the valve mechanism 135 (seeFigs. 7 and10 ) inserted into the through-hole 139 with respect to the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. - The pair of
ribs 157 is provided so that therib 156 is interposed between theribs 157 in the front-rear direction. Eachrib 157 is U-shaped, with an opening of the "U" shape facing therib 156 when viewed from above. Theribs 157 are adapted to fix the position of therod 165 of thevalve body 161 of the valve mechanism 135 (seeFig. 7 ) with respect to the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. - The pair of
ribs 158 is provided so that therib 156 and theribs 157 are interposed between theribs 158 in the front-rear direction. Eachrib 158 is bent at its distal end. The bent portion of eachrib 158 at the distal end is capable of engaging with anengagement portion 152 of the support member 150 (seeFig. 10 ). - As illustrated in
Fig. 7 , thefilm 133 has a rectangular shape. As illustrated inFig. 10 , thefilm 133 is welded to thetop end face 130A of thecartridge casing 130, thetop end face 137A of theperipheral wall 137 of the firstinner lid 131, and thetop end face 149A of therib 149 of the secondinner lid 132. Thefilm 133 does not necessarily have a rectangular shape. Thefilm 133 may have any shape other than a rectangular shape provided that thefilm 133 can be welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and the top end face 149A as described above. - As illustrated in
Fig. 7 , thefilm 133 has anopening 159 and anopening 160. Theopening 159 is formed at a position corresponding to therib 144 in a state where thefilm 133 is welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and thetop end face 149A. Hence, thefilm 146 welded to therib 144 is exposed to an outside through theopening 159 in a state where thefilm 133 is welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and thetop end face 149A. Theopening 160 is formed at a position corresponding to therib 156, theribs 157, theribs 158 and thevalve mechanism 135 in a state where thefilm 133 is welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and thetop end face 149A. Hence, therib 156, theribs 157, theribs 158, and thevalve mechanism 135 are exposed to an outside through theopening 160 in a state where thefilm 133 is welded to the top end face 130A, the top end face 137A, and thetop end face 149A. - As illustrated in
Fig. 7 , theouter lid 134 has a generally box-like shape opening downward. Theouter lid 134 includes thetop wall 39, thefront wall 82, therear wall 83, theright side wall 84, and theleft side wall 85. Thefront wall 82 extends downward from the front end of thetop wall 39. Thefront wall 82 has a lower end connected to thefront wall 40 of thecartridge casing 130. Thefront wall 82 of theouter lid 134 and thefront wall 40 and the connectingwall 49 of thecartridge casing 130 constitute the front wall of theink cartridge 30. Therear wall 83 extends downward from the rear end of thetop wall 39. Therear wall 83 has a lower end connected to therear wall 41 of thecartridge casing 130. Therear wall 83 of theouter lid 134 and therear wall 41 of thecartridge casing 130 constitute the rear wall of theink cartridge 30. Theright side wall 84 extends downward from a right end of thetop wall 39 and connects thefront wall 82 to therear wall 83. Theright side wall 84 has a lower end connected to theright side wall 37 of thecartridge casing 130. Theright side wall 84 of theouter lid 134 and theright side wall 37 of thecartridge casing 130 constitute the right side wall of theink cartridge 30. Theleft side wall 85 extends downward from a left end of thetop wall 39 and connects thefront wall 82 to therear wall 83. Theleft side wall 85 has a lower end connected to theleft side wall 38 of thecartridge casing 130. Theleft side wall 85 of theouter lid 134 and theleft side wall 38 of thecartridge casing 130 constitute the left side wall of theink cartridge 30. - Each of the
front wall 82, therear wall 83, theright side wall 84 and theleft side wall 85 has theopening 86. Theengagement claws 88 of thecartridge casing 130 can engage with theopenings 86, respectively. By engaging theengagement claws 88 with theopenings 86, theouter lid 134 covers thecartridge casing 130 from above. In the embodiment, theopenings 86 are formed in theouter lid 134 while theengagement claws 88 are provided at thecartridge casing 130. However, theengagement claws 88 may be provided at theouter lid 134 while theopenings 86 may be formed in thecartridge casing 130. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 and5 , thetop wall 39 has anopening 44 that extends in the front-rear direction. Theopening 44 is formed at a position upward of therib 156, theribs 157 and theribs 158 of the secondinner lid 132. - The
outer lid 134 includes the protrudingportion 43 that protrudes upward from thetop wall 39. The protrudingportion 43 is provided on thetop wall 39 so as to surround theopening 44 from right, left and rear sides thereof. The lock shaft 145 (Fig. 3 ) can access the protrudingportion 43 from an outside. - As illustrated in
Fig. 6 , the protrudingportion 43 has a rear end whose rear surface faces rearward. The rear surface of the protrudingportion 43 serves as thelock surface 151. Thelock surface 151 is positioned upward relative to the top surface of thetop wall 39. Thelock surface 151 extends in the up-down direction and in the left-right direction. In a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, thelock surface 151 facing rearward is in contact with thelock shaft 145. Since thelock surface 151 facing rearward abuts on thelock shaft 145, theink cartridge 30 is held in thecartridge attachment section 110 against the urging force of thecoil spring 78. Accessed components or members, such as the protrudingportion 43, can be accessed from the outside of theink cartridge 30 in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 and5 , the protrudingportion 43 includes the pair ofwalls 114. The pair ofwalls 114 is positioned frontward of thelock surface 151, with theopening 44 interposed therebetween. Each of thewalls 114 has an upper end surface including ahorizontal surface 154 and asloped surface 155. Thehorizontal surface 154 has a rear end continuous to thelock surface 151. Thesloped surface 155 is positioned frontward relative to thehorizontal surface 154. Thesloped surface 155 is continuous to a front end of thehorizontal surface 154. Thesloped surface 155 faces upward and frontward. Thesloped surface 155 slopes so that its front end is positioned further downward than its rear end. Since thehorizontal surface 154 connects thelock surface 151 to the slopedsurface 155, thelock surface 151 and thesloped surface 155 do not provide a ridge-like shape. Hence, during the insertion process of theink cartridge 30 into thecartridge attachment section 110, thelock shaft 145 is smoothly guided by the slopedsurface 155 and thehorizontal surface 154 toward a position further rearward than thelock surface 151 while contacting thesloped surface 155 and thehorizontal surface 154. - The
outer lid 134 further includes anoperation portion 90. Theoperation portion 90 is provided on thetop wall 39 at a position rearward relative to thelock surface 151. Theoperation portion 90 may be manipulated by a user. Thetop wall 39 has a subordinateupper surface 91 at its rear end portion. Theoperation portion 90 is disposed above the subordinateupper surface 91 and spaced apart from the subordinateupper surface 91. Theoperation portion 90 has a generally flat plate-like shape. Specifically, theoperation portion 90 protrudes upward from a boundary region between the subordinateupper surface 91 and a remaining upper surface of thetop wall 39 to a height the same as the protrudingportion 43. An upper end of theoperation portion 90 is positioned further frontward than a lower end of theoperation portion 90. As illustrated inFigs. 5 and6 , arib 94 is provided between theoperation portion 90 and the subordinateupper surface 91. Therib 94 connects theoperation portion 90 to the subordinateupper surface 91. Therib 94 extends rearward from the boundary region between the subordinateupper surface 91 and the remaining upper surface. Therib 94 has a dimension in the left-right direction smaller than a dimension in the left-right direction of theoperation portion 90 and also smaller than a dimension in the left-right direction of the subordinateupper surface 91. Therib 94 can suppress deformation of a rear portion of theoperation portion 90 in the up-down direction. - The
operation portion 90 has a surface facing upward and rearward. This surface serves as anoperation surface 92. A rear portion of theoperation surface 92 and the subordinateupper surface 91 are positioned so as to overlap with each other in the front-rear direction. In other words, when theink cartridge 30 is viewed from above, the rear portion of theoperation surface 92 overlaps with the subordinateupper surface 91. On theoperation surface 92, a plurality of projections, e.g., a plurality of projectingribs 93, extending in the left-right direction is formed. The projectingribs 93 are spaced apart from one another in the front-rear direction. The projectingribs 93 as a plurality of projections allow the user to physically recognize theoperation surface 92. The projectingribs 93 can also serve to prevent the user's finger from slipping over theoperation surface 92 when the user manipulates theoperation surface 92. As described above, the accessed components or members can be accessed from the outside of theink cartridge 30 in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. However, the accessed components may be components to be accessed by the user for manipulating the same in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. - The
operation surface 92 can be visually recognized when theink cartridge 30 is viewed from an upper side thereof. Theoperation surface 92 can also be visually recognized when theink cartridge 30 is viewed from a rear side thereof. The user manipulates theoperation surface 92 in order to remove theink cartridge 30 attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 therefrom. Incidentally, in the embodiment, theoperation portion 90 is formed integrally with theouter lid 134. Hence, theoperation portion 90 is fixed to theouter lid 134 and immovable relative to theouter lid 134. Thus, theoperation portion 90 does not pivotally move relative to theouter lid 134. Therefore, a force applied from the user to theoperation surface 92 is directly transmitted to theouter lid 134 without changing a direction of the force. - The outer surface of each of the
front wall rear wall top wall 39, thebottom wall right side wall left side wall ink cartridge 30 need not be configured as one flat surface. That is, the front surface (i.e. the outer surface of the front wall) of theink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when theink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from its front side and that is positioned frontward relative to a front-rear center of theink cartridge 30 in its operational state. Accordingly, a front surface of the connectingwall 49 may constitute a part of the front surface of the front wall of theink cartridge 30. The rear surface (i.e. the outer surface of the rear wall) of theink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when theink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from its rear side and that is positioned rearward relative to the front-rear center of theink cartridge 30. The top surface (i.e. the outer surface of the top wall) of theink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when theink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from above and that is positioned upward relative to an up-down (vertical) center of theink cartridge 30. The bottom surface (i.e. the outer surface of the bottom wall) of theink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when theink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from below and that is positioned downward relative to the up-down center of theink cartridge 30. The same is applied to the right surface (i.e. the outer surface of the right side wall) of theink cartridge 30 and the left surface (i.e. the outer surface of the left side wall) of theink cartridge 30. The right surface of theink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when theink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from its right side and that is positioned rightward relative to a left-right center of theink cartridge 30. The left surface of theink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that is visible when theink cartridge 30 in its operational posture is viewed from its left side and that is positioned leftward relative to the left-right center of theink cartridge 30. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 to 6 , theouter lid 134 further includes a light-blockingplate 67. The light-blockingplate 67 is provided on the top surface (outer surface) of thetop wall 39. The light-blockingplate 67 protrudes upward from the top surface of thetop wall 39. The light-blockingplate 67 has a flat plate-like shape that extends in the front-rear direction. The light-blockingplate 67 is integral with thetop wall 39. The light-blockingplate 67 may not be integral with thetop wall 39. The light-blockingplate 67 is positioned frontward relative to the protrudingportion 43. The light-blockingplate 67 is also positioned frontward relative to the IC board 64 (described later). In the embodiment, the light-blockingplate 67 is a resin plate containing a colored material capable of absorbing light (such as, black pigment, carbon black pigment, or black dye). Alternatively, the light-blockingplate 67 may be configured by attaching a material that cannot transmit light, such as aluminum, to side surfaces of a plate capable of transmitting light. - The light-blocking
plate 67 has acutout 66 as illustrated inFig. 6 . Thecutout 66 is recessed downward from anupper edge 67C of the light-blockingplate 67 and extends in the front-rear direction. Thecutout 66 is formed in the light-blockingplate 67 at a position in alignment with theoptical sensor 113 in the left-right direction when theink cartridge 30 is completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. The light-blockingplate 67 has left and right surfaces serving as a light-blockingsurface 67A. Light emitted from an outside of theink cartridge 30 and travelling in the left-right direction can access the light-blockingsurface 67A. Specifically, the light-blockingsurface 67A includes a light-blockingportion 68 adapted to block light emitted from theoptical sensor 113 and travelling in the left-right direction (seeFigs. 2 and6 ) during the attachment and removal process of theink cartridge 30 relative to thecartridge attachment section 110. In other words, the light-blockingportion 68 is configured to either prevent a light from passing therethrough or to alter a path of the light when the light-blockingportion 68 receives the light. The light-blockingportion 68 is provided at a region of the light-blockingsurface 67A from afront edge 67B of the light-blockingplate 67 to a front edge of thecutout 66. During the attachment and removal process of theink cartridge 30 relative to thecartridge attachment section 110, the light emitted from the light emitter of theoptical sensor 113 is incident on the light-blockingportion 68 before the light arrives at the light receiver of theoptical sensors 113. At this time, the intensity of light received at the light receiver is less than a predetermined intensity, for example, zero. Note that the light-blockingportion 68 may completely block the light traveling in the left-right direction, or may partially attenuate the light. Alternatively, the light-blockingportion 68 may refract the light to change a traveling direction thereof, or may fully reflect the light. The phrase "to block light" herein implies that the light emitted from the light emitter is prevented from reaching the light receiver in an amount that the light receiver can detect the light-blockingplate 67. When theink cartridge 30 is completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, thecutout 66 opposes theoptical sensors 113, so that the light emitted from the light emitter of theoptical sensor 113 can pass through thecutout 66 to reach the light receiver of theoptical sensors 113. - The light-blocking
plate 67 may not be formed with thecutout 66. Depending on types of theink cartridge 30, the light-blockingplate 67 may or may not have thecutout 66. In other words, depending on types of theink cartridge 30, the light-blockingplate 67 may or may not be detected through theoptical sensor 113 in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. Specifically, the types of theink cartridge 30 imply that colors of ink stored in theink cartridge 30, types of ink (pigment ink or dye ink) stored in theink cartridge 30 and initial amounts of ink (large amount or small amount) stored in theink cartridge 30, for example. - As illustrated in
Fig. 22 , a light-blockingplate 267 has a flat plate-like shape that extends in the front-rear direction. No cutout is formed in the light-blockingplate 267. The light-blockingplate 267 has a configuration the same as that of the light-blockingplate 67 except that thecutout 66 is not formed. The light-blockingplate 267 has a light-blockingsurface 267A including a light-blockingportion 268. Thelight blocking portion 268 is provided in a region of the light-blockingsurface 267A from afront edge 267B of the light-blockingplate 267 to a position where theoptical sensor 113 opposes when theink cartridge 30 is completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. In this case, during the attachment and removal process of theink cartridge 30 relative to thecartridge attachment section 110, the light emitted from the light emitter of theoptical sensor 113 is blocked, attenuated, refracted, or reflected by the light-blockingportion 268. Further, since the light-blockingportion 268 has aportion 268A opposing theoptical sensor 113 in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, the light emitted from the light emitter of theoptical sensor 113 is blocked, attenuated, refracted, or reflected by the light-blockingportion 268 when theink cartridge 30 is completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. - With the light-blocking
plate 67, theprinter 10 can determine, for example, whether theink cartridge 30 has been attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 based on the intensity of the light received by the light receiver of theoptical sensor 113 during the attachment and removal process of theink cartridge 30 relative to thecartridge attachment section 110. In terms of theink cartridge 30 with the light-blockingplate 267, theprinter 10 may determine whether theink cartridge 30 has been attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 based on whether or not the light emitted from the light emitter of theoptical sensor 113 is blocked by the light-blockingplate 267, that is, the light-blockingplate 267 is detected, when theink cartridge 30 has been attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. - Further, the
printer 10 can determine the type of theink cartridge 30 attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 based on the presence or absence of thecutout 66, that is, based on whether the light emitted from the light emitter of theoptical sensor 113 passes through thecutout 66 to be received by the light receiver of theoptical sensors 113. The user also may visually determine the type of theink cartridge 30 based on the presence or absence of thecutout 66. Further, theprinter 10 may determine the information on theink cartridge 30 attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 based on change of detection signals outputted from theoptical sensor 113 during the attachment process of theink cartridge 30 to thecartridge attachment section 110 and when theink cartridge 30 has been attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 to 6 , theIC board 64 is disposed at the top surface of thetop wall 39. TheIC board 64 is positioned between the light-blockingplate 67 and the protrudingportion 43 in the front-rear direction. TheIC board 64 is positioned closer to theink supply portion 34 than the protrudingportion 43 is to theink supply portion 34 in the front-rear direction. In other words, at thetop wall 39, the light-blockingplate 67, theIC board 64, and the protrudingportion 43 are arranged in this order from the front side to the rear side of thetop wall 39. Specifically, at thetop wall 39, the light-blockingsurface 67A of the light-blockingplate 67, upper surfaces of theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64, and thelock surface 151 of the protrudingportion 43 are arranged in this order from the front side to the rear side of thetop wall 39. TheIC board 64 is electrically connected to the fourcontacts 106 during the insertion process of theink cartridge 30 into thecartridge attachment section 110. In a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, electrical connection between theIC board 64 and the fourcontacts 106 are maintained. - The
IC board 64 includes a substrate, an IC (not illustrated), and the fourelectrodes 65. The substrate supports the IC. The fourelectrodes 65 are mounted on the substrate. The fourelectrodes 65 are electrically connected to the IC. The fourelectrodes 65 extend in the front-rear direction and are arrayed in the left-right direction. The fourelectrodes 65 are disposed on an upper surface of the substrate and exposed to an outside to allow electrical access thereto from above. The upper surfaces of the fourelectrodes 65 can directly contact the fourcontacts 106 of thecase 101, respectively when theink cartridge 30 has been attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. The IC is a semiconductor integrated circuit. The IC readably stores data indicative of information on theink cartridge 30, such as a lot number, a manufacturing date, a color of the ink, the number of printable sheets of paper, and the like. Incidentally, the substrate may be a rigid substrate or a flexible substrate having flexibility. - As illustrated in
Fig. 10 , theink cartridge 30 includes thefirst storage chamber 32, thesecond storage chamber 33, anink valve chamber 35, and theair communication passage 72. Thefirst storage chamber 32, thesecond storage chamber 33, theink valve chamber 35, and theair communication passage 72 are provided inside theink cartridge 30. - The inner
bottom wall portion 45 is provided inside theink cartridge 30. More specifically, thecartridge casing 130 has the innerbottom wall portion 45. The innerbottom wall portion 45 extends in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. In a state where thecartridge casing 130 supports the firstinner lid 131, the innerbottom wall portion 45 opposes thebottom wall 136 of the firstinner lid 131 in the up-down direction. Theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45 is continuous with theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48. - An upper end of the
first storage chamber 32 is defined by thelower surface 136B of thebottom wall 136 of the firstinner lid 131. A lower end of thefirst storage chamber 32 is defined by theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45 and anupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48. A front end of thefirst storage chamber 32 is defined by aninner surface 40A of thefront wall 40. A rear end of thefirst storage chamber 32 is defined by aninner surface 41A of therear wall 41. A left end of thefirst storage chamber 32 is defined by theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. A right end of thefirst storage chamber 32 is defined by theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37. Thus, thefirst storage chamber 32 is a space defined by thelower surface 136B of thebottom wall 136 of the firstinner lid 131, theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45, theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48, theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40, theinner surface 41A of therear wall 41, theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, and theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. A dimension in the front-rear direction of thefirst storage chamber 32 is greater than a dimension in the left-right direction of thefirst storage chamber 32. Gaps between thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37 and theleft side wall 38, and the firstinner lid 131 are sealed liquid-tightly with thefilm 133. - The
first ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 protrude into thefirst storage chamber 32 from thelower surface 136B of thebottom wall 136 of the firstinner lid 131. Thelower surface 136B is one of the surfaces defining thefirst storage chamber 32. - The
ribs lower surface 136B. However, no ribs protrude from the surfaces defining thefirst storage chamber 32 other than thelower surface 136B. That is, none of theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45, theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48, theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40, theinner surface 41A of therear wall 41, theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, and theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38 has an inwardly protruding portion, such as a rib, protruding or extending therefrom toward thefirst storage chamber 32. Preferably, no inwardly protruding portion should be formed on theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45, theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48, theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40, theinner surface 41A of therear wall 41, theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, and theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. However, inwardly protruding portions may be formed on these surfaces. - At the time of manufacturing the
ink cartridge 30, the ink stored in thefirst storage chamber 32 is in contact with theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45, theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48, theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40, theinner surface 41A of therear wall 41, theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, and theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. - As described above, the through-
hole 46 is formed in thebottom wall 136 of the firstinner lid 131. Through the through-hole 46, thefirst storage chamber 32 is in communication with theair chamber 36 of theair communication passage 72. - The
second storage chamber 33 is provided in the interior space of thecartridge casing 130 at a position downward relative to thefirst storage chamber 32 when theink cartridge 30 is in its operational posture. Thesecond storage chamber 33 is adapted to store ink therein. Thesecond storage chamber 33 has a volume smaller than that of thefirst storage chamber 32. Thus, a smaller amount of ink can be stored in thesecond storage chamber 33 than in thefirst storage chamber 32. - An upper end of the
second storage chamber 33 is defined by alower surface 45B of the innerbottom wall portion 45. A lower end of thesecond storage chamber 33 is defined by anupper surface 42A of the mainbottom wall portion 42. A rear end of thesecond storage chamber 33 is defined by theinner surface 41A of therear wall 41. A left end of thesecond storage chamber 33 is defined by theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38 while a right end of thesecond storage chamber 33 is defined by theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37. Thesecond storage chamber 33 and theink valve chamber 35 are partitioned by apartitioning wall 50. A front end of thesecond storage chamber 33 is defined by asurface 50A of thepartitioning wall 50. Thesurface 50A is a rear surface of thepartitioning wall 50 and is closer to thesecond storage chamber 33 than to a front surface of thepartitioning wall 50. Thesecond storage chamber 33 is a space defined by thelower surface 45B of the innerbottom wall portion 45, theupper surface 42A of the mainbottom wall portion 42, theinner surface 41A of therear wall 41, theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38, and thesurface 50A of thepartitioning wall 50. - At the time of manufacturing the
ink cartridge 30, the ink stored in thesecond storage chamber 33 is in contact with thelower surface 45B of the innerbottom wall portion 45, theupper surface 42A of the mainbottom wall portion 42, theinner surface 41A of therear wall 41, theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38, and thesurface 50A of thepartitioning wall 50. - The
second storage chamber 33 is in communication with thefirst storage chamber 32 through a communication hole 47 (Figs. 10 and11 ) formed in the innerbottom wall portion 45. As illustrated inFig. 11 , thecommunication hole 47 is formed at a rear-right end portion of the innerbottom wall portion 45. In other words, an open end of thecommunication hole 47 is open to theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45. As illustrated inFig. 10 , thesecond storage chamber 33 is also in communication with theink valve chamber 35 through a through-hole 99 formed in thepartitioning wall 50. Theink valve chamber 35 extends from thesecond storage chamber 33 in thefrontward direction 51. - As illustrated in
Fig. 10 , theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45 and theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 are sloped. Theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45 and theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 slope relative to the front-rear direction so that a front end of theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 is positioned further upward than a rear end of theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45. That is, theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45 and theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 slope downward toward thecommunication hole 47. - The
communication hole 47 need not be formed in the rear-right end portion of the innerbottom wall portion 45. Thecommunication hole 47 may be formed in a front-rear center portion of the innerbottom wall portion 45, for example. Alternatively, thecommunication hole 47 may be formed in the innerbottom wall portion 45 across an entire region in the left-right direction, or may be formed in the subordinatebottom wall portion 48. - In the embodiment, the
upper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45 slopes relative to the front-rear direction, that is, slopes downward toward thecommunication hole 47. However, theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45 need not slope as described above. - As illustrated in
Figs. 10 and14 , theupper surface 48A includes thecurved surface 115A, thecurved surface 116A, and thecurved surface 119A. - The
curved surface 115A extends downward from the lower end of theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37. That is, thecurved surface 115A is continuously connected to the lower end of theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37. Thecurved surface 116A extends downward from the lower end of theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. That is, thecurved surface 116A is continuously connected to the lower end of theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. Thecurved surface 115A and thecurved surface 116A are provided by theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48. Although not illustrated in the drawings, theupper surface 45A includes a curved region continuously connected to theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, and another curved region continuously connected to theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. Each of thecurved surface 115A and thecurved surface 116A has a radius of curvature that is greater than that of the curved regions of theupper surface 45A. Thecurved surface 115A is curved so that its lower end is positioned further leftward than its upper end. Thecurved surface 116A is curved so that its lower end is positioned further rightward than its upper end. Thecurved surface 115A and thecurved surface 116A are curved so as to expand outward of thecartridge casing 130. The lower end of thecurved surface 115A is connected to the lower end of thecurved surface 116A. Here, the lower end of thecurved surface 115A and the lower end of thecurved surface 116A provide a lowermost portion of thefirst storage chamber 32 at its front portion, that is, a lowermost portion of theupper surface 48A. In other words, the lower end of thecurved surface 115A is connected to the lower end of thecurved surface 116A (i.e. the lowermost portion of theupper surface 48A as well as the lowermost portion of thefirst storage chamber 32 at its front portion), and the lower end of thecurved surface 116A is connected to the lower end of thecurved surface 115A (i.e. the lowermost portion of theupper surface 48A as well as the lowermost portion of thefirst storage chamber 32 at its front portion). Accordingly, at the front portion of thefirst storage chamber 32, a curved inner surface having a U-shaped cross-section is formed by theupper surface 48A, and the U-shaped curved inner surface (i.e. theupper surface 48A) connects theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37 to theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. - The outer
curved surface 115B of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 is curved in a direction substantially parallel to a direction that the innercurved surface 115A is curved. In other words, the outercurved surface 115B is curved in a direction the same as a direction that the innercurved surface 115A is curved. The outercurved surface 116B of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 is curved in a direction substantially parallel to a direction that the innercurved surface 116A is curved. In other words, the outercurved surface 116B is curved in a direction the same as the innercurved surface 116A is curved. Incidentally, the outercurved surfaces curved surfaces - As illustrated in
Fig. 10 , thecurved surface 119A extends downward from the lower end of theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40. That is, thecurved surface 119A is continuously connected to the lower end of theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40. Thecurved surface 119A is provided by theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48. Thecurved surface 119A is curved so that its lower end is positioned further rearward than its upper end. Thecurved surface 119A is curved so as to expand outward of thecartridge casing 130. The outercurved surface 119B of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 is curved in a direction substantially parallel to a direction that the innercurved surface 119A is curved. In other words, the outercurved surface 119B is curved in a direction the same as a direction that the innercurved surface 119A is curved. Incidentally, the outercurved surface 119B need not be curved. For example, the outercurved surface 119B may be bent. - As illustrated in
Fig. 11 , theinner surface 40A includes thecurved surface 117A, thecurved surface 118A, and anintermediate surface 121A between thecurved surface 117A and thecurved surface 118A. Thecurved surface 117A extends frontward from the front end of theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37. That is, thecurved surface 117A is continuously connected to the front end of theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37. Thecurved surface 118A extends frontward from the front end of theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. That is, thecurved surface 118A is continuously connected to the front end of theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. Thecurved surface 117A has a front end continuously connected to a right end of theintermediate surface 121A of theinner surface 40A. Thecurved surface 118A has a front end continuously connected to a left end of theintermediate surface 121A of theinner surface 40A. Thecurved surface 117A and thecurved surface 118A are provided by theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40. Thecurved surface 117A is curved so that its front end is positioned further leftward than its rear end. Thecurved surface 118A is curved so that its front end is positioned further rightward than its rear end. Thecurved surface 117A and thecurved surface 118A are curved so as to expand outward of thecartridge casing 130. Theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40 has a left-right center portion that constitutes a frontmost portion of thefirst storage chamber 32. That is, theintermediate surface 121A includes the frontmost portion of thefirst storage chamber 32. The front end of thecurved surface 117A and the front end of thecurved surface 118A are connected to theintermediate surface 121A that includes the frontmost portion of thefirst storage chamber 32. - The outer
curved surface 117B of thefront wall 40 is curved in a direction substantially parallel to a direction that the innercurved surface 117A is curved. In other words, the outercurved surface 117B is curved in a direction the same as a direction that the innercurved surface 117A is curved. The outercurved surface 118B of thefront wall 40 is curved substantially parallel to a direction that the innercurved surface 118A is curved. In other words, the outercurved surface 118B is curved in a direction the same as a direction that the innercurved surface 118A is curved. Incidentally, the outercurved surfaces curved surfaces - The inner
curved surface 115A, the innercurved surface 117A, and the innercurved surface 119A are smoothly and continuously connected to each other to provide a boundary region formed with a substantially spherical surface. Similarly, the innercurved surface 116A, the innercurved surface 118A, and the innercurved surface 119A are smoothly and continuously connected to each other to provide a boundary region formed with a substantially spherical surface. Further, the outercurved surface 115B, the outercurved surface 117B, and the outercurved surface 119B are smoothly and continuously connected to each other to provide a boundary region formed with a spherical surface. Still further, the outercurved surface 116B, the outercurved surface 118B, and the outercurved surface 119B are smoothly and continuously connected to each other to provide a boundary region formed with a substantially spherical surface. InFig. 7 , the spherical surface of the boundary region between the outercurved surface 116B, the outercurved surface 118B, and the outercurved surface 119B is designated by areference sign 200. - In the embodiment, the
curved surface 115A and thecurved surface 116A are continuously connected to each other at their lower ends. However, as will be described later in theink cartridge 30K according to the variation of the embodiment, the lower end of thecurved surface 115A and the lower end of thecurved surface 116A may not be continuously connected to each other. - Further, in the embodiment, the front end of the
curved surface 117A and the front end of thecurved surface 118A are connected to theintermediate surface 121A. However, the front end of thecurved surface 117A and the front end of thecurved surface 118A may be continuously connected to each other. In this case, the connecting portion between thecurved surface 117A and thecurved surface 118A constitutes the frontmost portion of thefirst storage chamber 32. - Further, in the embodiment, the
upper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 includes thecurved surface 115A connected to the lower end of theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, thecurved surface 116A connected to the lower end of theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38, and thecurved surface 119A connected to the lower end of thefront surface 40A of thefront wall 40. Further, in the embodiment, theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40 includes thecurved surface 117A connected to the front end of theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, and thecurved surface 118A connected to the front end of theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. However, an inner curved surface(s) may be provided so as to be connected to the rear end of theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, the rear end of theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38, theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40, theinner surface 41A of therear wall 41, theupper surface 42A of the mainbottom wall portion 42, theupper surface 45A of the innerbottom wall portion 45, and theupper surface 48A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48. For example, as illustrated inFig. 21 , theupper surface 45A may include acurved surface 122A continuously connected to theinner surface 41A of therear wall 41. Further, a curved surface may extend from one end of an inner surface of at least one of theright side wall 37, theleft side wall 38, thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, the mainbottom wall portion 42, the subordinatebottom wall portion 48, and the innerbottom wall portion 45. - Further, the inner
curved surface 115A and the innercurved surface 116A each have a radius of curvature of, for example, not less than 1 mm. More specifically, the innercurved surface 115A and the innercurved surface 116A each have a radius of the curvature in a range from 1 mm to 3 mm. The outercurved surface 115B and the outercurved surface 116B each have a radius of curvature of, for example, not less than 7 mm. - The
air communication passage 72 is a space that provides communication between thefirst storage chamber 32 and an exterior of theink cartridge 30. Theair communication passage 72 is positioned above thecartridge casing 130. As illustrated inFig. 10 , theair communication passage 72 includes theair chamber 36, the through-hole 142 (seeFigs. 9A and 9B ), and thelabyrinth path 143 described above. - The
air chamber 36 is a space formed in theair communication passage 72. Theair chamber 36 communicates with thefirst storage chamber 32 at one end and communicates with thelabyrinth path 143 at the other end. Theair chamber 36 has a portion positioned above thefirst storage chamber 32 and below thelabyrinth path 143. Theair chamber 36 has a lower end defined by theupper surface 136A of thebottom wall 136 of the firstinner lid 131 and an upper end defined by thelower surface 132B of the secondinner lid 132. Theair chamber 36 has a front end, a rear end, a right end, and a left end defined by the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 137 (seeFigs. 8A and 8B ) of the firstinner lid 131. A gap between the secondinner lid 132 and theperipheral wall 137 of the firstinner lid 131 is sealed liquid-tightly with thefilm 133. - As described above, the upper end of the
first storage chamber 32 is defined by thelower surface 136B of thebottom wall 136 of the firstinner lid 131. That is, thefirst storage chamber 32 and theair chamber 36 are partitioned by thebottom wall 136. - The
air chamber 36 is in communication with thefirst storage chamber 32 through the through-hole 46 penetrating thebottom wall 136 in the up-down direction. Further, theair chamber 36 is in communication with thelabyrinth path 143 through the through-hole 142 (seeFigs. 9A and 9B ) formed in the secondinner lid 132. As described above, the semipermeable membrane 141 (seeFig. 7 ) is welded to the lower end surface of therib 140 of the secondinner lid 132. With this structure, ink flowing from thefirst storage chamber 32 through the through-hole 46 is blocked by thesemipermeable membrane 141 and does not reach the through-hole 142. Hence, thesemipermeable membrane 141 prevents ink from flowing into thelabyrinth path 143. - As described above, the
labyrinth path 143 is defined by theupper surface 132A, the plurality of ribs 144 (seeFig. 9B ), and the film 146 (seeFig. 7 ). Thelabyrinth path 143 is a continuous passage that extends in the left-right direction, repeatedly U-tuming in the front-rear direction. Thelabyrinth path 143 is provided in a form of a groove covered with thefilm 146 at its top end. Thelabyrinth path 143 has one end in communication with the through-hole 142 and another end in communication with thecommunication hole 147. Thelabyrinth path 143 is in communication with theair chamber 36 through the through-hole 142 formed in the secondinner lid 132. Thelabyrinth path 143 is provided at a surface (i.e.upper surface 132A) of the secondinner lid 132, the surface being opposite to a surface (i.e.lower surface 132B) of the secondinner lid 132 that defines the upper end of theair chamber 36. In the embodiment, the surface defining the upper end of theair chamber 36 is an inner surface of the secondinner lid 132. Thelabyrinth path 143 is positioned upward relative to theair chamber 36. Thelabyrinth path 143 is in communication with aninterior space 134A (seeFig. 10 ) of theouter lid 134 through the communication hole 147 (seeFig. 7 ). Theinterior space 134A is in communication with the outside of theink cartridge 30 through the opening 44 (seeFig. 4 ) formed in thetop wall 39 of theouter lid 134 and through a gap between theouter lid 134 and thecartridge casing 130. That is, thelabyrinth path 143 can communicates with the atmosphere through thecommunication hole 147. - The
valve mechanism 135 has a function for interrupting and establishing communication between thefirst storage chamber 32 and the atmosphere. The configuration of thevalve mechanism 135 according to the embodiment will be described in detail below. Thevalve mechanism 135 may have a different configuration, provided that thevalve mechanism 135 can perform the function for interrupting and establishing communication between thefirst storage chamber 32 and the atmosphere. For example, thevalve mechanism 135 may be so configured that the valve body 161 (described later) is movable in a direction other than the up-down direction. - As illustrated in
Figs. 7 and10 , thevalve mechanism 135 includes thevalve body 161, acoil spring 162, and thelever 163. Thevalve body 161 includes therod 165 and aseal member 166 fitted onto therod 165. As illustrated inFig. 10 , theseal member 166 and a part of therod 165 are disposed in theair communication passage 72. Thecoil spring 162 and the remaining part of therod 165 are disposed in theinterior space 134A of theouter lid 134. Incidentally, the arrangement of the components in thevalve mechanism 135 is not limited to the above. For example, all the components of thevalve mechanism 135 may be disposed in theair communication passage 72. - The
support member 150 illustrated inFig. 7 is adapted to pivotally movably support thevalve mechanism 135, more specifically, the lever 163 (described later) of thevalve mechanism 135. Thesupport member 150 has an internal space in which a part of thevalve mechanism 135 can be disposed. As illustrated inFig. 10 , thesupport member 150 includes twoengagement portions 152, with one at a front end and the other at a rear end. Upon engagement of theengagement portions 152 with the bent portions of the distal ends of theribs 158 of the secondinner lid 132, thesupport member 150 is supported to the secondinner lid 132. - The
rod 165 is disposed between the pair of ribs 157 (seeFig. 9B ) of the secondinner lid 132. Therod 165 has an upper surface including afront portion 165A, arear portion 165B, and asloped portion 165C connecting thefront portion 165A to therear portion 165B. The slopedportion 165C slopes downward from its front end to its rear end so that thefront portion 165A is positioned further upward than therear portion 165B. - The
rod 165 extends in the up-down direction. Therod 165 is inserted into the through-hole 139 (seeFig. 9A ) formed in the secondinner lid 132. Theseal member 166 is formed of an elastic material such as rubber. Theseal member 166 is in pressure contact with therod 165 without a gap between theseal member 166 and therod 165. With this structure, no gap is formed between theseal member 166 and therod 165. - The
valve body 161 is movable in the up-down direction from a closed position illustrated inFigs. 10 and16 to an open position illustrated inFig. 3 . Movement of thevalve body 161 in the left-right direction and in the front-rear direction is restricted by therib 156 and theribs 157 of the second inner lid 132 (seeFig. 9B ). - The
rod 165 has protruding portions that protrude frontward and rearward, respectively. As illustrated inFigs. 10 and16 , in a state where thevalve body 161 is in the closed position, therod 165 is supported by the secondinner lid 132 such that lower surfaces of the protruding portions of thevalve body 161 contact theupper surface 132A of the secondinner lid 132. Further, in a state where thevalve body 161 is in the closed position, theseal member 166 covers a peripheral edge portion of the through-hole 46. A gap between the through-hole 46 and theseal member 166 is thus closed. That is, the through-hole 46 is air-tightly and liquid-tightly closed by therod 165 and theseal member 166. Accordingly, communication between thefirst storage chamber 32 and the outside of the ink cartridge 30 (i.e. the atmosphere) is interrupted. - As illustrated in
Fig. 3 , thevalve body 161 in the open position is positioned further upward than thevalve body 161 in the closed position (seeFigs. 10 and16 ). In a state where thevalve body 161 is in the open position, the lower surfaces of the protruding portions of therod 165 is spaced apart upward from theupper surface 132A of the secondinner lid 132. Further, theseal member 166 is spaced apart upward from the peripheral edge portion of the through-hole 46. Hence, the through-hole 46 is open. As a result, communication between thefirst storage chamber 32 and the outside of the ink cartridge 30 (i.e. the atmosphere) through the through-hole 46 is established. At this time, theseal member 166 pressingly contacts the through-hole 139 from below and covers a peripheral edge portion of the through-hole 139. A gap between theseal member 166 and the through-hole 139 is thus closed. That is, the through-hole 139 is air-tightly and liquid-tightly closed by therod 165 and theseal member 166. - As illustrated in
Fig. 10 , thecoil spring 162 is fitted around therod 165. Thecoil spring 162 has an upper end that is in contact with therod 165 of thevalve body 161 and a lower end that is in contact with theupper surface 132A of the secondinner lid 132. In a state where thevalve body 161 is in the closed position, thecoil spring 162 has a length shorter than its natural length. Hence, when thevalve body 161 is in the closed position, thecoil spring 162 urges thevalve body 161 upward, that is, urges thevalve body 161 in a direction from the closed position to the open position. Incidentally, a member for urging thevalve body 161 is not limited to thecoil spring 162. In place of thecoil spring 162, thevalve body 161 may be urged by a leaf spring or an elastic member such as rubber. - As illustrated in
Figs. 7 and10 , thelever 163 has a through-hole serving as apivot shaft portion 167. Thelever 163 includes afirst projection 168 and asecond projection 169. Thefirst projection 168 and thesecond projection 169 extend outward from thepivot shaft portion 167. - As illustrated in
Fig. 10 , thesupport member 150 is provided with a pair ofprotrusions 170. One of the pair ofprotrusions 170 protrudes from an inner right surface of thesupport member 150 defining a right end of the internal space of thesupport member 150. The other of the pair ofprotrusions 170 protrudes from an inner left surface of thesupport member 150 defining a left end of the internal space of thesupport member 150. Theprotrusions 170 are inserted into thepivot shaft portion 167. More specifically, theprotrusion 170 protruding from the inner right surface of thesupport member 150 is inserted into thepivot shaft portion 167 from the right, and theprotrusion 170 protruding from the inner left surface of thesupport member 150 is inserted into thepivot shaft portion 167 from the left. With this structure, thelever 163 is supported by thesupport member 150 so as to be pivotally movable relative to thesupport member 150 about an axis of thepivot shaft portion 167. Incidentally, thepivot shaft portion 167 may be a protrusion that protrudes from thelever 163 rightward and leftward. In this case, the inner left and right surfaces of thesupport member 150 have openings, respectively, and the protrusion as thepivot shaft portion 167 is inserted in the openings. - As illustrated in
Figs. 7 and10 , thefirst projection 168 and thesecond projection 169 extend in opposite directions with respect to thepivot shaft portion 167. Thefirst projection 168 and thesecond projection 169 are substantially positioned on opposite sides of thepivot shaft portion 167. Thefirst projection 168 extends in a direction away from thepivot shaft portion 167, and thesecond projection 169 extends in a direction substantially opposite to the extending direction of thefirst projection 168. - The
lever 163 is pivotally movable from a first position illustrated inFigs. 10 and16 to a second position illustrated inFig. 3 . The axis of thepivot shaft portion 167 functions as a pivot center when thelever 163 is pivotally moved between the first position and the second position. - When the
lever 163 is in the first position, thefirst projection 168 extends downward. A rear edge of a distal end (i.e. lower end) of thefirst projection 168 is positioned rearward relative to the axis of thepivot shaft portion 167. More specifically, as illustrated inFig. 10 , animaginary line 172 connecting the axis of thepivot shaft portion 167 and the rear edge of the distal end of thefirst projection 168 is inclined rearward at a prescribed angle θ3 relative to animaginary line 173 that extends from the axis of thepivot shaft portion 167 in the gravitational direction. In the embodiment, the prescribed angle θ3 is 5 degrees. The lower end of thefirst projection 168 contacts therear portion 165B at the upper surface of therod 165 of thevalve body 161 to press thevalve body 161 downward. Hence, thevalve body 161 is placed in the closed position. Further, when thelever 163 is in the first position, thesecond projection 169 extends upward, more specifically, diagonally upward and rearward. Thesecond projection 169 is positioned so as to be interposed between the pair ofwalls 114 of the protrudingportion 43. Thesecond projection 169 does not extend upward beyond the pair ofwalls 114. That is, an upper end of thesecond projection 169 is positioned downward relative to an upper end of the pair ofwalls 114.. - When the
lever 163 is in the first position, pivotal frontward movement of thefirst projection 168, i.e. pivotal clockwise movement of thelever 163 inFig. 10 toward the second position, is restricted by the slopedportion 165C of therod 165 of thevalve body 161, and also restricted by the distal end of thefirst projection 168 positioned further rearward than the axis of thepivot shaft portion 167. Note that, in order to restrict the pivotal frontward movement of thefirst projection 168, thecoil spring 162 is designed so as to have an upward urging force greater than a force required to move thefirst projection 168 from therear portion 165B of the upper surface of therod 165 of thevalve body 161 to thefront portion 165A thereof. Incidentally, the slopedportion 165C may be provided or may not be provided at the upper surface of therod 165. Even if the slopedportion 165C is not provided and therod 165 has a flat upper surface, the pivotal clockwise movement of thelever 163 inFig. 10 toward the second position can be restricted as long as the distal end of thefirst projection 168 is positioned rearward relative to the axis of thepivot shaft portion 167. - Pivotal rearward movement of the
first projection 168, i.e. pivotal counterclockwise movement of thelever 163 inFig. 10 , is restricted upon abutment of thelever 163 against aprojection 171 provided on the inner right surface of thesupport member 150. Thelever 163 is therefore maintained in the first position. Thelever 163 in the first position restricts thevalve body 161 from moving to the open position against the urging force of thecoil spring 162 and maintains thevalve body 161 at the closed position. - As illustrated in
Fig. 3 , when thelever 163 is in the second position, thelever 163 is spaced apart from theprojection plate 111. Thefirst projection 168 extends frontward. Thesecond projection 169 extends downward, more specifically, diagonally downward and rearward. Further, thevalve body 161 is in the open position. - As illustrated in
Fig. 6 , theink supply portion 34 extends frontward from the connectingwall 49 at a position downward of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48 and frontward of the mainbottom wall portion 42. As illustrated inFig. 10 , theink supply portion 34 is positioned downward of the innerbottom wall portion 45. Further, theink supply portion 34 is positioned downward and rearward of thefront wall 40. - As illustrated in
Fig. 12 , theink supply portion 34 includes acylinder 75, a packing 76, avalve 77, thecoil spring 78, acap 79, and a snap-fit mechanism 74. - The
cylinder 75 has an outer shape that is generally tubular or hollow cylindrical. The shape of thecylinder 75 is not limited to a circular cylindrical shape. Thecylinder 75 may have any shape as long as thecylinder 75 is hollow. Thecylinder 75 has a distal end (i.e. front end) directed frontward. The distal end of thecylinder 75 is positioned downward and rearward of thefront wall 40. Thecylinder 75 has an opening at its front end. Thecylinder 75 defines an internal space serving as theink valve chamber 35. Theink valve chamber 35 extends in thefrontward direction 51 from thesecond storage chamber 33. - The packing 76 is a disc-shape member and has a through-
hole 73 at its center region. The packing 76 is made of an elastic material such as rubber or elastomer. As illustrated inFig. 10 , the packing 76 is disposed at the front end of thecylinder 75 so as to cover the front opening of thecylinder 75. The through-hole 73 penetrates the center region of the packing 76 in the front-rear direction to provide a tubular-shaped inner peripheral surface. The through-hole 73 has an inner diameter slightly smaller than an outer diameter of theink needle 102. - As illustrated in
Fig. 10 , thevalve 77 and thecoil spring 78 are accommodated in theink valve chamber 35. Thevalve 77 can contact and separate from the packing 76 by moving in the front-rear direction. When thevalve 77 contacts the packing 76, the through-hole 73 formed in the center region of the packing 76 is closed. When thevalve 77 separates from the packing 76, the through-hole 73 is open. Thecoil spring 78 urges thevalve 77 frontward. Accordingly, thevalve 77 closes the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 while no external force is applied to thevalve 77. - As illustrated in
Figs. 13A and 13B , thecap 79 has an outer shape that is generally rectangular parallelepiped. Thecap 79 has a hollow configuration. Incidentally, thecap 79 may have an outer shape other than a rectangular parallelepiped provided that thecap 79 is a hollow member whose front end and rear end are open. - The
cap 79 has a rear end formed with anopening 87. Thecylinder 75 and the packing 76 are inserted into an inner space of thecap 79 through theopening 87. Accordingly, thecap 79 covers thecylinder 75 and the packing 76 from a front side thereof. As illustrated inFig. 10 , in a state where thecap 79 covers thecylinder 75, a lower end of thecap 79 is provided at a position substantially the same as a lower end of thecartridge casing 130 with respect to the up-down direction. - The
cap 79 has a front end wall having afront surface 79A. The front end wall of thecap 79 is formed with anink supply port 71. In a state where thecap 79 covers thecylinder 75 and the packing 76, theink valve chamber 35 is in communication with the outside of theink cartridge 30 through the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 and theink supply port 71 of thecap 79. - The
ink supply portion 34 further includes a first absorbingmember 182 and a second absorbingmember 183. As illustrated inFig. 10 , the first absorbingmember 182 and the second absorbingmember 183 are disposed in the inner space of thecap 79. The first absorbingmember 182 and the second absorbingmember 183 are formed of a porous material such as polyurethane foam. The first absorbingmember 182 and the second absorbingmember 183 have minute holes provided by the porous material. Ink enters the minute holes, so that the ink is absorbed by the first absorbingmember 182 and the second absorbingmember 183. The first absorbingmember 182 and the second absorbingmember 183 are thus adapted to absorb ink. - The first absorbing
member 182 has an annular shape, as illustrated inFig. 12 . The first absorbingmember 182 is disposed along a circumferential edge defining theink supply port 71. That is, the first absorbingmember 182 is disposed adjacent to a circumferential edge portion of theink supply port 71. Incidentally, the first absorbingmember 182 may not have an annular shape. For example, the first absorbingmember 182 may have a rectangular shape. In this case, the first absorbingmember 182 may be disposed only at a position downward of the circumferential edge defining theink supply port 71. - The second absorbing
member 183 has a plate-like shape. The second absorbingmember 183 is positioned rearward relative to the first absorbingmember 182. The second absorbingmember 183 is supported by an inner lower surface of thecap 79 so as to be disposed in a lower portion of the inner space of thecap 79, that is, at a position downward relative to theink valve chamber 35. The inner lower surface of thecap 79 is a surface defining a lower end of the inner space of thecap 79. Incidentally, the second absorbingmember 183 need not have a plate-like shape. Further, the second absorbingmember 183 may be disposed over an entire inner peripheral surface of thecap 79 defining the inner space of thecap 79. - As illustrated in
Figs. 10 and13B , at least onegroove 184 extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the inner peripheral surface of thecap 79, more specifically, the inner lower surface of thecap 79. Thegroove 184 has a front end connected to the first absorbingmember 182. The front end of thegroove 184 may be positioned in proximity to the first absorbingmember 182. Thegroove 184 has a rear end connected to the second absorbingmember 183. The rear end of thegroove 184 may be positioned in proximity to the second absorbingmember 183. That is, thegroove 184 is formed in thecap 79 at a region from the circumferential edge portion of theink supply port 71 to the second absorbingmember 183. With this configuration, even if ink is leaked from thecylinder 75 to the inner space of thecap 79, the ink can be introduced to the second absorbingmember 183 through thegroove 184 to be absorbed by the second absorbingmember 183. - Note that the first absorbing
member 182 and the second absorbingmember 183 may not be disposed in the inner space of thecap 79. Further, thegroove 184 may not be formed at the inner lower surface of thecap 79. In a state where thecap 79 covers thecylinder 75 and the packing 76, the inner peripheral surface of thecap 79 and an outer peripheral surface of thecylinder 75 provide a gap therebetween. Even if thegroove 184 is not formed at the inner lower surface of thecap 79, ink leaked from thecylinder 75 is introduced to the second absorbingmember 183 via the gap. - As illustrated in
Figs. 13A and 13B , thecap 79 has an outer peripheral surface extending rearward from thefront surface 79A. The outer peripheral surface of thecap 79 is formed with fourguide grooves grooves front surface 79A. Theguide groove 175A is provided at an upper-right end portion of thecap 79. Theguide groove 175B is provided at an upper-left end portion of thecap 79. Theguide groove 175C is provided at a lower-right end portion of thecap 79. Theguide groove 175D is provided at a lower-left end portion of thecap 79. In other words, theguide groove 175A and theguide groove 175D are disposed on opposite sides of theink valve chamber 35 in a first perpendicular direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction. Further, theguide groove 175B and theguide grove 175C are disposed on opposite sides of theink valve chamber 35 in a second perpendicular direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction and the first perpendicular direction. Specifically, in the embodiment, the first perpendicular direction is a direction connecting from the upper-right side of thecap 79 to the lower-left side of thecap 79, and the second perpendicular direction is a direction connecting from the upper-left side of thecap 79 to the lower-right side of thecap 79. As described above, the outer shape of thecap 79 is generally rectangular parallelepiped. That is, when projected in the front-rear direction, thecap 79 has a projection plane having a generally rectangular shape defined by four sides and four corners connecting two adjacent sides. The fourguide grooves front surface 79A of thecap 79 has a generally rectangular shape in a front view, more specifically, when thefront surface 79A is viewed from its front side,, and the front edges of the fourguide grooves front surface 79A. In other words, theguide grooves cap 79. Specifically, thecap 79 has four protrusions at the outer peripheral surface thereof. Of the four protrusions, two protrusions protrude rightward and leftward, respectively, such that theink supply port 71 is disposed between the two protrusions in the left-right direction. The two protrusions have respective upper end surfaces serving as afirst guide surface 176 of theguide grooves 175A and afirst guide surface 176 of theguide groove 175B, respectively. The two protrusions have respective lower end surfaces serving as afirst guide surface 176 of theguide grooves 175C and a first guide surface176 of theguide groove 175D, respectively. - Hereinafter, the four
guide grooves grooves 175." Theguide grooves 175 are elongated in the front-rear direction. Hence, a longitudinal direction of theguide grooves 175 is aligned with the front-rear direction. - The
guide grooves IC board 64. Theguide grooves IC board 64. That is, of the fourguide grooves 175, twoguide grooves 175 are positioned outward of theIC board 64 in one of therightward direction 55 and theleftward direction 56, while the remaining twoguide grooves 175 are positioned outward of theIC board 64 in the other of therightward direction 55 and theleftward direction 56. Incidentally, each of the fourguide grooves 175 need not be positioned outward of theIC board 64 in the left-right direction. - The
guide groove 175A has a shape and arrangement that is symmetrical to theguide groove 175B with respect to the left-right direction. Each of theguide grooves first guide surface 176 and asecond guide surface 177. Theguide groove 175C has a shape and arrangement that is symmetrical to theguide groove 175D with respect to the left-right direction. Each of theguide grooves first guide surface 176, thesecond guide surface 177, and athird guide surface 178. Note that thethird guide surface 178 of theguide groove 175C does not appear inFig. 13B . However, thethird guide surface 178 of theguide groove 175C is identical with thethird guide surface 178 of theguide groove 175D. - The
first guide surface 176 extends in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. Thethird guide surface 178 extends in the left-right direction and a direction sloped relative to the front-rear direction so that its rear end is positioned further upward than its front end. That is, thethird guide surface 178 is sloped relative to the front-rear direction. In each of theguide grooves third guide surface 178 is positioned rearward relative to thefirst guide surface 176. Further, in each of theguide grooves first guide surface 176 has a rear end continuous to a front end of thethird guide surface 178. Thesecond guide surface 177 extends in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction. In each of theguide grooves second guide surface 177 is connected to thefirst guide surface 176. In each of theguide grooves second guide surface 177 is connected to both thefirst guide surface 176 and thethird guide surface 178. However, thefirst guide surface 176, thesecond guide surface 177, and thethird guide surface 178 need not be connected to each other. - As illustrated in
Fig. 6 , thethird guide surface 178 is inclined relative to the front-rear direction at an angle θ1, and the bottom surface of the mainbottom wall portion 42 is inclined relative to the front-rear direction at an angle θ2. The angle θ1 is greater than the angle Θ2. - The rear end of the
first guide surface 176 of eachguide grooves 175 is positioned rearward relative to a front end of the packing 76. - The
first guide surface 176 of each of theguide grooves first guide surface 176 of each of theguide grooves third guide surface 178 of each of theguide grooves second guide surface 177 of each of theguide grooves second guide surface 177 of each of theguide grooves - When viewed in the front-rear direction, each of the
guide grooves first guide surface 176 and thesecond guide surface 177. That is, the front edge of each of theguide grooves front surface 79A in the front view, more specifically, when thefront surface 79A is viewed from its front side. No surface is formed in thecap 79 at positions confronting each of the first guide surfaces 176, each of the second guide surfaces 177, and each of the third guide surfaces 178. That is, each of theguide grooves first guide surface 176. Further, each of theguide grooves second guide surface 177. Still further, each of theguide grooves third guide surface 178. That is, each of the first guide surfaces 176 is open in a direction perpendicular thereto. Further, each of the second guide surfaces 177 is open in a direction perpendicular thereto. Still further, each of the third guide surfaces 178 is open in a direction perpendicular thereto. More specifically, thefirst guide surface 176 of each of theguide grooves first guide surface 176 of each of theguide grooves second guide surface 177 of each of theguide grooves second guide surface 177 of each of theguide grooves third guide surface 178 of each of theguide grooves guide grooves first guide surface 176 forms a prescribed angle with thesecond guide surface 177. For example, an angle formed by thefirst guide surface 176 and thesecond guide surface 177 is 90 degrees. In each of theguide grooves second guide surface 177 has a dimension in the up-down direction greater than a dimension of thefirst guide surface 176 in the left-right direction. - During the insertion process of the
ink cartridge 30 into thecartridge attachment section 110, theink cartridge 30 is inserted into thecartridge attachment section 110 in thefrontward direction 51. At this time, theprojection 105A disposed at the upper-right side relative to theink needle 102 enters theguide groove 175A, theprojection 105B disposed at the upper-left side relative to theink needle 102 enters theguide groove 175B, theprojection 105C disposed at the lower-right side relative to theink needle 102 enters theguide groove 175C, and theprojection 105D disposed at the lower-left side relative to theink needle 102 enters theguide groove 175D. In this way, theguide grooves projections - More specifically, the
first guide surface 176 of theguide groove 175A is guided by thefirst guide surface 196 of theprojection 105A, and thesecond guide surface 177 of theguide groove 175A is guided by thesecond guide surface 197 of theprojection 105A. Further, thefirst guide surface 176 of theguide groove 175B is guided by thefirst guide surface 196 of theprojection 105B, and thesecond guide surface 177 of theguide groove 175B is guided by thesecond guide surface 197 of theprojection 105B. Still further, thefirst guide surface 176 of theguide groove 175C is guided by thefirst guide surface 196 of theprojection 105C, and thesecond guide surface 177 of theguide groove 175C is guided by thesecond guide surface 197 of theprojection 105C. Moreover, thefirst guide surface 176 of theguide groove 175D is guided by thefirst guide surface 196 of theprojection 105D, and thesecond guide surface 177 of theguide groove 175D is guided by thesecond guide surface 197 of theprojection 105D. - As the
ink cartridge 30 is further inserted forward into thecartridge attachment section 110, thethird guide surface 178 of theguide groove 175C is positioned above theprojection 105C disposed at the lower-right side relative to theink needle 102, and thethird guide surface 178 of theguide groove 175D is positioned above theprojection 105D disposed at the lower-left side relative to theink needle 102. As a result, a space is formed between thefirst guide surface 196 of theprojection 105C and thethird guide surface 178 of theguide groove 175C in the up-down direction. A space is also formed between thefirst guide surface 196 of theprojection 105D and thethird guide surface 178 of theguide groove 175D in the up-down direction. The spaces formed between the first guide surfaces 196 and the third guide surfaces 178 allow theink cartridge 30 to be pivotally movable in thecase 101. - The
guide grooves 175 need not be formed at the upper-right end portion, the upper-left end portion, the lower-right end portion, and the lower-left end portion of thecap 79 provided that theguide grooves 175 are respectively formed in thecap 79 at positions corresponding to theprojections 105 of thecartridge attachment section 110. For example, theguide grooves 175 may be respectively formed at a left-right center portion of an upper surface of thecap 79, a left-right center portion of a lower surface of thecap 79, a vertical (up-down) center portion of a right surface of thecap 79, and a vertical (up-down) center portion of a left surface of thecap 79. Further, three orless guide grooves 175, or five ormore guide grooves 175 may be formed at thecap 79. That is, thecap 79 may be formed with at least oneguide groove 175. - That is, the
cap 79 may be formed with twoguide grooves 175, instead of fourguide grooves 175. In this case, the twoguide grooves 175 may be formed so as to be arranged in the up-down direction or in the left-right direction. In case that the twoguide grooves 175 are arranged in the up-down direction, theguide grooves cap 79; or theguide grooves cap 79. Alternatively, in case that the twoguide grooves 175 are arranged in the left-right direction, theguide grooves cap 79; or theguide grooves cap 79. - Each of the
guide grooves 175 may have a surface that opposes thefirst guide surface 176. In this case, theguide groove 175 is defined by at least the surface opposing thefirst guide surface 176, thefirst guide surface 176, and thesecond guide surface 177. Thefirst guide surface 176 is not open in the direction perpendicular to thefirst guide surface 176 in this case. Further, each of theguide grooves 175 may have a surface that opposes thesecond guide surface 177. In this case, theguide groove 175 is defined by at least the surface opposing thesecond guide surface 177, thefirst guide surface 176, and thesecond guide surface 177. Thesecond guide surface 177 is not open in the direction perpendicular to thesecond guide surface 177 in this case. - Moreover, each of the
guide grooves third guide surface 178. In this case, each of theguide grooves first guide surface 176 and thesecond guide surface 177, similar to theguide grooves - The snap-
fit mechanism 74 illustrated inFig. 12 is configured to engage thecap 79 with one of thecartridge casing 130 and thecylinder 75. In the embodiment, the snap-fit mechanism 74 engages thecap 79 with thecartridge casing 130. - The snap-
fit mechanism 74 includes four projectingportions 179 and twoprojections 180. Two of the four projectingportions 179 are provided at theright side wall 37 of thecartridge casing 130, and the remaining two of the four projectingportions 179 are provided at theleft side wall 38 of thecartridge casing 130. Accordingly, in the embodiment, the four projectingportions 179 are provided at thecartridge casing 130. The twoprojections 180 are provided at thecap 79. - Specifically, the two projecting
portions 179 protrude rightward from theright side wall 37 and are spaced apart from each other in the up-down direction. The two projectingportions 179 protruding from theright side wall 37 do not appear inFig. 12 . As illustrated inFig. 12 , the remaining two projectingportions 179 protrude leftward from theleft side wall 38 and are spaced apart from each other in the up-down direction. Note that a set of the two projectingportions 179 provided at theright side wall 37 has a shape and arrangement that is symmetrical to a set of the remaining two projectingportions 179 with respect to the left-right direction. In other words, each of theleft side wall 37 and theright side wall 38 is formed with a recess that is recessed rearward. Each recess is adapted to receivecorresponding projection 180. That is, the snap-fit mechanism 74 includes the twoprojections 180, and the two recesses adapted to receive the correspondingprojections 180. As will be described later, the projectingportions 179 may protrude from thecylinder 75 of theink supply portion 34. As illustrated inFig. 6 , each of the projectingportions 179 has anengagement surface 179A facing rearward. - As illustrated in
Fig. 13A , each of the twoprojections 180 protrudes in an axial direction of thecap 79 from an edge portion defining theopening 87 of thecap 79. In the operational posture of theink cartridge 30, the axial direction of thecap 79 coincides with the front-rear direction, and theprojections 180 protrude rearward from thecap 79. Incidentally, theprojections 180 may protrude in a direction other than therearward direction 52 provided that thecap 79 is capable of being engaged with thecasing 130 by means of snap-fitting. - One of the two
projections 180 protrudes rearward from thecap 79 at a position rightward of theopening 87. The remaining one of the twoprojections 180 protrudes rearward from thecap 79 at a position leftward of theopening 87. That is, the twoprojections 180 are arranged to oppose each other in the left-right direction such that theopening 87 is interposed between the twoprojections 180. In a state where thecap 79 covers thecylinder 75, the one of the twoprojections 180 faces theright side wall 37 in the left-right direction, and the remaining one of the twoprojections 180 faces theleft side wall 38 in the left-right direction. In other words, in a state where thecap 79 covers thecylinder 75, the twoprojections 180 are arranged to oppose each other in the left-right direction, with thecartridge casing 130 interposed therebetween. - Each of the two
projections 180 has an upper end positioned downward relative to an upper end of thecap 79, and a lower end positioned upward relative to a lower end of thecap 79. When thecap 79 is viewed from its rear side, the twoprojections 180 does not protrude outward of an outer peripheral edge of thecap 79. In other words, when thecap 79 is viewed from its rear side, the twoprojections 180 are positioned inward of the outer peripheral edge of thecap 79. - Incidentally, each of the
projections 180 may have a portion positioned outward of the outer peripheral edge of thecap 79 when thecap 79 is viewed from its rear side. For example, the upper end of eachprojection 180 may be positioned upward relative to the upper end of thecap 79. Alternatively, the lower end of eachprojection 180 may be positioned downward relative to the lower end of thecap 79. - Each of the
projections 180 has a length in the up-down direction so that the length in the up-down direction at its rear end is smaller than the length in the up-down direction at its front end. That is, eachprojection 180 has such a tapered shape that its length in the up-down direction is gradually reduced toward its distal end (i.e. rear end). Incidentally, each of theprojections 180 may not have a tapered shape described above. - Each of the
projections 180 has adistal end portion 180A and a pair ofengagement pawls 181. One of the pair ofengagement pawls 181 protrudes upward (more specifically, diagonally upward and forward) from an upper surface of thedistal end portion 180A. The remaining one of the pair ofengagement pawls 181 protrudes downward (more specifically, diagonally downward and forward) from a lower surface of thedistal end portion 180A. Each of theengagement pawls 181 has a shape narrower than that of thedistal end portion 180A. In other words, eachengagement pawl 181 has a length in the up-down direction smaller than that of the remaining part of theprojection 180. With this configuration, eachengagement pawl 181 is resiliently deformable so as to be movable relative to thedistal end portion 180A of theprojection 180. More specifically, eachengagement pawl 181 is configured to be resiliently deformed so as to be pivotally movable in the up-down direction about a base end thereof (i.e., a portion connected to thedistal end portion 180A). - In a state where the
cap 79 covers thecylinder 75 and the packing 76 from a front side thereof, eachprotrusion 180 is received in the corresponding recess provided at thecasing 130, and eachengagement pawl 181 is engaged with theengagement surface 179A of the corresponding projecting portion 179 (seeFig. 6 ). More specifically, the pair ofengagement pawls 181 of theprojection 180 disposed rightward of theopening 87 is engaged with the engagement surfaces 179A of the two projectingportions 179 protruding rightward from theright side wall 37, while the pair ofengagement pawls 181 of theprojection 180 disposed leftward of theopening 87 is engaged with the engagement surfaces 179A of the two projectingportions 179 protruding leftward from theleft side wall 38. By virtue of these engagements, thecap 79 is retained at the attached state to thecartridge casing 130. - As illustrated in
Fig. 10 , in a state where thecap 79 covers thecylinder 75 and the packing 76 from a front side thereof, aninner surface 79B of the front end wall of the cap 79 (i.e. a surface opposite to thefront surface 79A) is positioned frontward relative to the packing 76 and in pressure contact with the packing 76. Further, in a state where thecap 79 covers thecylinder 75 and the packing 76 from a front side thereof, the front end of thecylinder 75 is positioned rearward relative to the packing 76 and in pressure contact with the packing 76. Therefore, the packing 76 is fixed between thecap 79 and thecylinder 75, while interposed therebetween. A gap between the packing 76 and thecylinder 75, and a gap between the packing 76 and thecap 79 are liquid-tightly sealed. - In a state where the
cap 79 covers thecylinder 75 and the packing 76 from a front side thereof, thecap 79 is positioned downward and rearward relative to thefront wall 40. - In the embodiment, the snap-
fit mechanism 74 engages thecap 79 with thecartridge casing 130. However, as described above, the snap-fit mechanism 74 may engage thecap 79 with thecylinder 75 of theink supply portion 34. In this case, the projectingportions 179 may protrude from an outer circumferential surface of thecylinder 75. Further, in a state where thecap 79 covers thecylinder 75, the twoprojections 180 are arranged to oppose each other such that thecylinder 75 is interposed between the twoprojections 180. - Next, an operation for attaching the
ink cartridge 30 to thecartridge attachment section 110 will be described with reference toFigs. 3 ,10 , and15-20 . - As illustrated in
Fig. 10 , in theink cartridge 30 prior to attachment to thecartridge attachment section 110, thevalve 77 is in contact with the packing 76 to close the through-hole 73. Accordingly, at this time, ink flow from theink valve chamber 35 to the outside of theink cartridge 30 is interrupted. Further, thelever 163 is in the first position. Thevalve body 161 is in the closed position as thefirst projection 168 of thelever 163 in the first position presses therod 165 of thevalve body 161 downward. In this state, the through-hole 46 is closed by therod 165 and theseal member 166 of thevalve body 161. Therefore, thefirst storage chamber 32 is not opened to the atmosphere. That is, communication between thefirst storage chamber 32 and the outside of theink cartridge 30 is interrupted. - As illustrated in
Figs. 15 and16 , theink cartridge 30 is inserted into thecase 101 through theopening 112 of thecartridge attachment section 110, with thefront wall top wall 39 facing upward. That is, theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecase 101 while moved in the frontward direction 51 (i.e. attachment direction). The user inserts theink cartridge 30 into thecartridge attachment section 110, while pushing therear wall ink cartridge 30 enters theguide groove 109 formed in the bottom wall of thecase 101. - As the
ink cartridge 30 is inserted into thecase 101, theprojections 105 advance into thecorresponding guide grooves 175 of theink supply portion 34 as illustrated inFig. 15 . Theguide grooves 175 are thus guided by theprojections 105, respectively. - As the
projections 105 advance into theguide grooves 175, respectively, thefirst guide surface 176 of theguide groove 175C and thefirst guide surface 176 of theguide groove 175D are supported by theprojection 105C disposed at the lower-right side relative to theink needle 102 and theprojection 105D disposed at the lower-left side relative to theink needle 102, respectively. Further, theprojection 105A disposed at the upper-right side relative to theink needle 102 and theprojection 105B disposed at the upper-left side relative to theink needle 102 are positioned in proximity to and above thefirst guide surface 176 of theguide groove 175A and thefirst guide surface 176 of theguide groove 175B, respectively. As a result, theink supply portion 34 is fixed in position relative to thecase 101 with respect to the up-down direction. - As the
projections 105 advance into theguide grooves 175, theprojection 105A disposed at the upper-right side relative to theink needle 102 and theprojection 105C disposed at the lower-right side relative to theink needle 102 are positioned in proximity to and rightward of thesecond guide surface 177 of theguide groove 175A and thesecond guide surface 177 of theguide groove 175C, respectively. Further, theprojection 105B disposed at the upper-left side relative to theink needle 102 and theprojection 105D disposed at the lower-left side relative to theink needle 102 are positioned in proximity to and leftward of thesecond guide surface 177 of theguide groove 175B and thesecond guide surface 177 of theguide groove 175D, respectively. As a result, theink supply portion 34 is fixed in position relative to thecase 101 with respect to the left-right direction. - As the
ink cartridge 30 is further inserted into thecase 101, theink needle 102 advances into the inner space of thecap 79 through theink supply port 71 to be press-fitted into the through-hole 73 of the packing 76. As described above, at this time, theink supply portion 34 is fixed in position relative to thecase 101 in the up-down direction and in left-right direction. Hence, theink needle 102 can pass through a center portion of theink supply port 71, without abutting against thecap 79. - As the
ink cartridge 30 is still further inserted into thecase 101, theink needle 102 enters theink valve chamber 35 and moves thevalve 77 away from the packing 76 against the urging force of the coil spring 78 (seeFig. 19 ). Theink needle 102 is thus connected to theink supply portion 34 to allow communication with each other. Hence, the ink is allowed to flow from thefirst storage chamber 32 and thesecond storage chamber 33 into the inner space of theink needle 102 through theink valve chamber 35. In this state, the urging force of thecoil spring 78 is exerted on theink cartridge 30 to urge theink cartridge 30 rearward. - Thereafter, when the
ink cartridge 30 is further inserted into thecase 101, the rear ends of theprojections guide grooves guide grooves guide grooves projections bottom wall portion 42 of thecartridge casing 130 slopes relative to the front-rear direction such that the bottom end at the front end portion of the mainbottom wall portion 42 is positioned downward relative to the bottom end at the rear end portion of the mainbottom wall portion 42. Hence, a space is formed in the up-down direction between the mainbottom wall portion 42 and the bottom of thecase 101. These spaces permit theink cartridge 30 to be pivotally movable about the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 so that the rear portion of theink cartridge 30 is moved downward in a state where theink needle 102 is force-fitted into the through-hole 73 and is in contact with the through-hole 73. The through-hole 73 at this time serves as a pivot center of this pivotal movement of theink cartridge 30. - When the
ink cartridge 30 is further inserted into thecase 101 after theink cartridge 30 is placed in a state capable of pivotally moving, thelock shaft 145 of thecartridge attachment section 110 contacts thesloped surfaces 155 of the pair ofwalls 114 and is guided along the sloped surfaces 155 (seeFig. 15 ). At this time, thesloped surfaces 155 receive a downward reaction force from thelock shaft 145. As a result, theink cartridge 30 is pivotally moved, with the rear portion of theink cartridge 30 moved downward (seeFigs. 18 and19 ). - As the
ink cartridge 30 is further inserted into thecase 101 and thefront wall ink cartridge 30 approaches a position near theinner end surface 59 of thecase 101, theprojection plate 111 of thecase 101 enter the space between the pair ofwalls 114 as illustrated inFig. 19 . However, since the rear portion of theink cartridge 30 has been moved downward as a result of the pivotal movement of theink cartridge 30, thelever 163 has also been moved downward. At this state, thebottom surface 111A of theprojection plate 111 has not yet contacted thelever 163 although thebottom surface 111A is positioned above thelever 163. - Further, when the
front wall ink cartridge 30 approaches the position near theinner end surface 59 of thecase 101, thelock shaft 145 moves past thesloped surfaces 155 and thehorizontal surfaces 154 and is positioned further rearward than thelock surface 151 as illustrated inFig. 19 . In other words, thelock shaft 145 is slightly spaced apart from theink cartridge 30. Further, at this time, a space is formed below thelock shaft 145. Theink cartridge 30 therefore receives no reaction force from thelock shaft 145. As a result, theink cartridge 30 is pivotally moved about the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 so that the rear portion of theink cartridge 30 moves upward (seeFigs. 3 and20 ). Note that the posture of theink cartridge 30 illustrated inFigs. 3 and20 is the operational posture, that is, the upright posture. - As the rear portion of the
ink cartridge 30 is moved upward as a result of the pivotal movement of theink cartridge 30, thelever 163 is also moved upward. Accordingly, asurface 169A at the distal end (i.e. upper end) of thesecond projection 169 of thelever 163 contacts thebottom surface 111A of theprojection plate 111 from below. In other words, thelever 163 can access theprojection plate 111 while moving upward. Note that thelever 163 comes into contact with thebottom surface 111A of theprojection plate 111 after theink needle 102 enters theink valve chamber 35, that is, after theink needle 102 is connected to the ink supply portion 34 (seeFigs. 3 ,17 , and19 ). - When the
surface 169A at the upper end of thesecond projection 169 of thelever 163 contacts thebottom surface 111A of theprojection plate 111, thesecond projection 169 receives a downward reaction force from theprojection plate 111. In other words, thelever 163 receives a force pivotally moving in a clockwise direction inFig. 19 . This force is greater than a force required to move thefirst projection 168 from therear portion 165B at the upper surface of therod 165 of thevalve body 161 to thefront portion 165A thereof. Thelever 163 can therefore pivotally move in the clockwise direction inFig. 19 from the first position toward the second position (see alsoFig. 3 ). At this time, thefirst projection 168 of thelever 163 moves over the slopedportion 165C at the upper surface of therod 165 of thevalve body 161, and thus, moves from therear portion 165B thereof to thefront portion 165A thereof. At the same time, thevalve body 161 slightly moves downward as therod 165 is pushed downward by thelever 163. As a result, thefirst projection 168 of thelever 163 stops pushing thevalve body 161 downward. Hence, thelever 163 no longer maintains thevalve body 161 in the closed position. That is, thelever 163 in the second position releases restriction against the movement of thevalve body 161 to the open position. In this state, thevalve body 161 moves upward from the closed position to the open position by virtue of the urging force of the coil spring 162 (seeFig. 3 ), thereby opening the through-hole 46. Consequently, thefirst storage chamber 32 is open to the atmosphere through the through-hole 46, theair chamber 36, thelabyrinth path 143, and thecommunication hole 147. That is, thevalve body 161 in the open position allows communication between thefirst storage chamber 32 and theair communication passage 72. - As described above, the
lever 163 in the second position is spaced apart from theprojection plate 111. Further, theseal member 166 is in pressure contact with the through-hole 139 from below, covering the peripheral edge portion of the through-hole 139. The gap between theseal member 166 and the through-hole 139 is air-tightly and liquid-tightly closed. - As described above, in order to allow the
first storage chamber 32 to be opened to the atmosphere, thevalve body 161 needs to be first pushed downward and then moved upward. This configuration can suppress unintentional movement of thevalve body 161 to the open position. Note that the movement of thelever 163 is irreversible. That is, thelever 163 can be moved from the first position to the second position by abutting against theprojection plate 111. However, even if theink cartridge 30 is removed from thecase 101, thelever 163 cannot be returned to the first position once thelever 163 is moved into the second position. The movement of thevalve body 161 is also irreversible, accordingly. - Further, when the
ink cartridge 30 is placed into the state illustrated inFigs. 3 and20 after the pivotal movement of theink cartridge 30, the light-blocking plate 67 (specifically, the portion of the light-blockingplate 67 where thecutout 66 is formed) is positioned between the light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor 113 (seeFig. 2 ). Hence, theprinter 10 can determine that theink cartridge 30 has been attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. Incidentally, inFigs. 3 and15 to 20 , theoptical sensor 113 is not illustrated. - Further, when the
ink cartridge 30 is placed into the state illustrated inFigs. 3 and20 after the pivotal movement of theink cartridge 30, eachelectrode 65 of theIC board 64 electrically contacts thecorresponding contact 106 while resiliently deforming thecontact 106 upward. - When the
ink cartridge 30 is pivotally moved so that the rear portion of theink cartridge 30 moves upward, thelock surface 151 also moves upward. Then, when theink cartridge 30 is placed into the state illustrated inFigs. 3 and20 , thelock surface 151 faces rearward and opposes thelock shaft 145. When the user stops pushing theink cartridge 30 frontward in this state, theink cartridge 30 moves rearward due to the urging force of thecoil spring 78. Since thelock surface 151 faces rearward and opposes thelock shaft 145, thelock shaft 145 abuts on thelock surface 151 and engages with thelock surface 151 when theink cartridge 30 moves rearward. This engagement between thelock shaft 145 and thelock surface 151 restricts theink cartridge 30 from moving further rearward. In this way, theink cartridge 30 is held in the attached position by the engagement between thelock shaft 145 and thelock surface 151. Theink cartridge 30 can thus adopt the operational posture as a result of access of the lock surface 151 (ink cartridge 30) to the lock shaft 145 (more specifically, a surface at a front end of the lock shaft 145) in theupward direction 54. - In other words, when the
ink cartridge 30 has been attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 as a result of insertion, in thefrontward direction 51, of theink needle 102 into theink supply portion 34 and as a result of engagement of thelock surface 151 with thelock shaft 145, theink cartridge 30 takes an attachment posture. When theink cartridge 30 takes the attachment posture, theink cartridge 30 is capable of supplying ink to therecording head 21 and being operated by theprinter 10 for recording images. - In order to remove the
ink cartridge 30 from thecartridge attachment section 110, the user pushes theoperation surface 92 downward in a state illustrated inFigs. 3 and20 . As theoperation surface 92 is pushed downward, theink cartridge 30 is pivotally moved about the through-hole 73 of the packing 76 as the pivot center, with its rear portion moving downward (seeFigs. 18 and19 ). Thelock surface 151 is thus moved to a position downward relative to thelock shaft 145. As a result, theink cartridge 30 is no longer restricted from moving rearward. Hence, theink cartridge 30 moves rearward relative to thecartridge attachment section 110 by the urging force of thecoil spring 78. Accordingly, the user can take theink cartridge 30 out of thecartridge attachment section 110 while holding thecartridge casing 130. Note that thefirst storage chamber 32 remains opened to the atmosphere even after theink cartridge 30 is removed from thecartridge attachment section 110 since thevalve body 161 remains in the open position. - <Variations and Modifications>
- Next, the
ink cartridge 30K corresponding to a color of black will be described while referring toFigs 23 to 25 . As illustrated inFig. 23 , theink cartridge 30K includes afront wall rear wall top wall 239, abottom wall right side wall left side wall front wall rear wall ink cartridge 30K have dimensions in the left-right direction greater than those of thefront wall rear wall ink cartridges 30 corresponding to three colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow (seeFig. 4 ), respectively. In other words, compared to theink cartridges 30 corresponding to the colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow, thefront wall rear wall ink cartridge 30K expand rightward. Accordingly, theink supply portion 34, theIC board 64, the protrudingportion 43 and theoperation portion 90 of theink cartridge 30K are positioned leftward relative to a left-right center of theink cartridge 30K. However, the light-blockingplate 67 of theink cartridge 30K is positioned at the left-right center of theink cartridge 30K. - As described above, the
ink cartridge 30K corresponding to a color of black differs from theink cartridges 30 corresponding to respective colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow in that thefront wall rear wall ink cartridge 30K expand rightward. Hereinafter, a structure of theink cartridge 30K different from theink cartridges 30 corresponding to colors of cyan, magenta, and yellow will be described in detail. - As illustrated in
Fig. 24 , theink cartridge 30K has a subordinatebottom wall portion 248 having anupper surface 248A. Theupper surface 248A is continuous with anupper surface 245A of an innerbottom wall portion 245, as illustrated inFig. 25 . Theupper surface 248A includes thecurved surface 115A, thecurved surface 116A, and anintermediate surface 120A. Theintermediate surface 120A is a flat surface, and is connected to thecurved surface 115A at its right end and to thecurved surface 116A at its left end. Theintermediate surface 120A of theupper surface 248A slopes relative to the left-right direction so that its left end is positioned further downward than its right end. Thus, the left end of theintermediate surface 120A of theupper surface 248A is a lowermost portion of theupper surface 248A. That is, the left end of theintermediate surface 120A of theupper surface 248A is a lowermost portion of thefirst storage chamber 32 at its front portion. Incidentally, theintermediate surface 120A of theupper surface 248A may slope relative to the left-right direction so that its right end is positioned further downward than its left end. Alternatively, theintermediate surface 120A of theupper surface 248A may not slope relative to the left-right direction, that is, may be a non-sloped flat surface parallel to the horizontal direction. Theintermediate surface 120A of theupper surface 248A is made to be flat and connected to theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38 via thecurved surface 116A, thereby enlarging a dimension in the widthwise direction (i.e. left-right direction) of thefirst storage chamber 32 of theink cartridge 30K. Hence, a larger amount of ink can be stored in thefirst storage chamber 32 of theink cartridge 30K than in thefirst storage chamber 32 of theink cartridge 30 illustrated inFig. 14 . - As illustrated in
Fig. 24 , thecurved surface 115A extends downward from the lower end of theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, and thecurved surface 116A extends downward from the lower end of theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. In other words, thecurved surface 115A is continuously connected to the lower end of theinner surface 37A of theright side wall 37, and thecurved surface 116A is continuously connected to the lower end of theinner surface 38A of theleft side wall 38. Thecurved surface 115A has a lower end connected to the right end of theintermediate surface 120A. Thecurved surface 116A has a lower end connected to the left end of theintermediate surface 120A. Here, the left end of theintermediate surface 120A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 248 constitutes the lowermost portion of the front portion of thefirst storage chamber 32 of theink cartridge 30K. That is, the lower end of thecurved surface 115A and the lower end of thecurved surface 116A are connected to theintermediate surface 120A of theupper surface 248A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 248 that includes the lowermost portion of the front portion of thefirst storage chamber 32. - The
upper surface 248A further includes thecurved surface 119A (seeFig. 10 ) continuously connected to a lower end of theinner surface 241A of therear wall 241. - The inner
curved surface 117A, the innercurved surface 118A, and the innercurved surface 119A of theink cartridge 30K each have a configuration the same as that in the embodiment described above, except that aninner surface 240A of thefront wall 240 has a dimension in the left-right direction greater than that of theinner surface 40A of thefront wall 40 of the ink cartridge 30 (seeFig. 25 ). - In the
ink cartridge 30K, the lower end of thecurved surface 115A and the lower end of thecurved surface 116A are connected to theintermediate surface 120A of theupper surface 248A of the subordinatebottom wall portion 248. However, the lower end of thecurved surface 115A and the lower end of thecurved surface 116A may be continuously connected to each other. - Incidentally, the
upper surface 245A may include a curved surface continuously connected to a lower end of aninner surface 241A of therear wall 241 as in the embodiment. - In the above-described embodiment, the
first ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 have shapes as illustrated inFigs. 8A and 8B . However, as long as each of thefirst ribs 185 and the correspondingsecond rib 186 are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction and have at least the incliningportion 185B and the incliningportion 186B, respectively, thefirst ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186 may not have the shapes illustrated inFigs. 8A and 8B . -
Fig. 26A illustrates a firstinner lid 1131 includingfirst ribs 1185 andsecond ribs 1186 according to a first variation to the embodiment. Each of thefirst ribs 1185 includes an extendingportion 1185A and an incliningportion 185B. Each of thesecond ribs 1186 includes an extendingportion 1186A and an incliningportion 1186B. Each one of thefirst ribs 1185 opposes corresponding one of thesecond ribs 1186 in the left-right direction. A distal end (i.e. rear end) of an incliningportion 1185B of eachfirst rib 1185 may be arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction as a distal end (i.e. rear end) of an incliningportion 1186B of the correspondingsecond rib 1186. -
Fig. 26B illustrates a firstinner lid 2131 includingfirst ribs 2185 andsecond ribs 2186 according to a second variation to the embodiment. Each of thefirst ribs 2185 includes an incliningportion 2185B. Each of thesecond ribs 2186 includes an incliningportion 2186B. Further,Fig. 26C illustrates a firstinner lid 3131 includingfirst ribs 3185 andsecond ribs 3186 according to a third variation to the embodiment. Each of thefirst ribs 3185 includes an incliningportion 3185B. Each of thesecond ribs 3186 includes an incliningportion 3186B. - As illustrated in
Fig. 26B , at least one of thefirst rib 2185 and thesecond rib 2186 need not have the extending portion. Likewise, as illustrated inFig. 26C , at least one of thefirst rib 3185 and thesecond rib 3186 need not have the extending portion. Note thatFigs. 26B and 26C illustrate configurations in which each of thefirst ribs second ribs - In the above-described embodiment, the lower ends of the
first ribs 185 and the lower ends of thesecond ribs 186 are provided at heights the same as one another. However, the lower ends of thefirst ribs 185 and the lower ends of thesecond ribs 186 may be provided at heights different from one another. For example, of the plurality offirst ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186, theribs side walls - The protruding length of the
first rib 185 may not be uniform across the entire region thereof. Likewise, the protruding length of thesecond rib 186 may not be uniform across the entire region thereof. For example, of thefirst ribs 185 and thesecond ribs 186, the base ends of the extendingportions inner surfaces side walls portions - In the above-described embodiment, the
front wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38 of thecartridge casing 130 has translucency so that the surface level of the ink stored in thefirst storage chamber 32 and the surface level of the ink stored in thesecond storage chamber 33 can be visually recognized from the outside of theink cartridge 30. Further, thefront wall 40, therear wall 41 and theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38 are exposed to an outside and constitute the outer surfaces of thecartridge casing 130, except for their upper end portions engaged with theouter lid 134. - However, each of the
front wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38 may have at least a portion forming the outer wall of thecartridge casing 130, that is, the wall of thecartridge casing 130 whose outer surface is exposed to the outside. - For example, a label may be adhered to a portion of the outer surface of one of the
front wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38, and the portion to which the label is adhered may degrade visual recognition to the surface level of the ink stored in each of thefirst storage chamber 32 and thesecond storage chamber 33 from the outside of theink cartridge 30. In this case, a portion of each of thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38 except for the portion to which the label is adhered constitutes the outer wall of thecartridge casing 130. Thus, the liquid storage chamber (e.g. thefirst storage chamber 32 and the second storage chamber 33) in theink cartridge 30 need not be visually recognized from the outside of theink cartridge 30 in any direction. However, it is preferable that thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38 each have a region through which the surface level of the ink stored in thefirst storage chamber 32 can be recognized. - Further, the
cartridge casing 130 may be covered with a cover, for example. In this case, however, the cover needs to be configured so as to expose a part of thefront wall 40, a part of therear wall 41, a part of theright side wall 37, and a part of theleft side wall 38 to an outside. For example, the cover may have four openings at positions opposing the part of thefront wall 40, the part of therear wall 41, the part of theright side wall 37, and the part of theleft side wall 38, respectively. If this is the case, the parts of thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38, those exposed to an outside through the openings, form the outer walls of thecartridge casing 130. - Incidentally, in a case where only a part of the
front wall 40, a part of therear wall 41, a part of theright side wall 37, and a part of theleft side wall 38 constitute the outer walls of thecartridge casing 130, it is preferable that a lower part of each of thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theright side wall 37, and theleft side wall 38 is exposed to an outside. - In the above-described embodiment, the
cartridge casing 130, the firstinner lid 131, the secondinner lid 132, theouter lid 134, and thesupport member 150 are assembled to provide theink cartridge 30. However, at least some of thecartridge casing 130, the firstinner lid 131, the secondinner lid 132, theouter lid 134, and thesupport member 150 may be integrally formed. For example, thecartridge casing 130 and theouter lid 134 may be integrally formed. Alternatively, the secondinner lid 132 and thesupport member 150 may be integrally formed. - In the above-described embodiment, contact between the
lock shaft 145 and thelock surface 151 holds theink cartridge 30 in the attached position. However, theink cartridge 30 may not be held in the attached position by the contact between thelock shaft 145 and thelock surface 151. Any other known configuration may be employed to hold theink cartridge 30 in the attached position. - In the above-described embodiment, the
semipermeable membrane 141 is welded to the lower end surface of therib 140. However, thesemipermeable membrane 141 may be welded at any other portion as long as thesemipermeable membrane 141 is welded to a portion capable of preventing ink drawn into theair chamber 36 through the through-hole 46 from flowing into thelabyrinth path 143. Further, in the above-described embodiment, thesemipermeable membrane 141 is welded. However, thesemipermeable membrane 141 need not be welded. - In the above-described embodiment, the two
projections 180 provided at thecap 79 oppose each other in the left-right direction. However, theprojections 180 may oppose each other in any direction other than the left-right direction. For example, theprojections 180 may oppose each other in the up-down direction. - In the above-described embodiment, the
valve mechanism 135 is configured to interrupt communication between thefirst storage chamber 32 and the atmosphere by closing the through-hole 46 and to provide communication between thefirst storage chamber 32 and the atmosphere by opening the through-hole 46. However, thevalve mechanism 135 may be configured to open and close a portion of theair communication passage 72 other than the through-hole 46. - Further, in the above-described embodiment, the
valve mechanism 135 moves away from the through-hole 46 as theink cartridge 30 is in the process of being moved upward (i.e. in a direction opposite to the gravitational direction) to engage thelock surface 151 with thelock shaft 145. However, thevalve mechanism 135 may so move as theink cartridge 30 is in the process of being moved in an attachment direction to thecartridge attachment section 110, that is, in a direction crossing the gravitational direction. - In the above-described embodiment, the
ink supply portion 34 is provided with thecylinder 75 and thecap 79 covering thecylinder 75. However, theink supply portion 34 need not be provided with thecap 79. In case theink supply portion 34 does not include thecap 79, theguide grooves 175 may be formed in an outer circumferential surface of thecylinder 75. - In the above-described embodiment, communication between the interior and the exterior of the
ink supply portion 34 is interrupted and provided by thevalve 77. However, the opening in the front end of thecylinder 75 may be formed by piercing, with a needle or the like, a seal member formed of elastic resin and having no through-hole, and may be closed by the elasticity of the seal member as the needle is retracted from the seal member. - In the above-described embodiment, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the main
bottom wall portion 42 is greater than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48. However, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the mainbottom wall portion 42 may be shorter than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the subordinatebottom wall portion 48. The connectingwall 49 may be disposed at a front-rear center portion of theink cartridge 30. Alternatively, the connectingwall 49 may be disposed at a position closer to therear wall 41 than to thefront wall 40. - In the above-described embodiment, the
ink cartridge 30 has the outer shape as illustrated inFigs. 4 and5 . Further, theink supply portion 34 extends frontward from the connectingwall 49 and positioned downward and rearward of thefront wall 40. However, theink cartridge 30 need not be so shaped and theink supply portion 34 need not be so positioned as illustrated inFigs. 4 and5 . - For example, the gap distance between the
right side wall 37 and theleft side wall 38 may be greater than the gap distance between thefront wall 40 and therear wall 41. Further, theink cartridge 30 may have a simple, rectangular outer shape. Still further, theink supply portion 34 may extends frontward from thefront wall 40. Alternatively, theink supply portion 34 may extend downward from the mainbottom wall portion 42 and may have a bent or curved distal end to allow theink supply port 71 to open frontward. - Next will be described, with reference to
Figs. 27A, 27B , and28 , details of theplates 104 provided in thecartridge attachment section 110. - As shown in
Fig. 28 , theplates 104 are arrayed in the left-right direction with a space being formed between neighboringplates 104 in thecartridge attachment section 110. Theink cartridge 30 is detachably attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 at a position between the neighboringplates 104. In the state where theink cartridge 30 has been attached to the position between the neighboringplates 104 in thecartridge attachment section 110, the neighboringplates 104 face theink cartridge 30 in the left-right direction. Theplates 104 extend both in the up-down direction and in the front-rear direction. Theplates 104 have the same shape and the same size with one another. - More specifically, as shown in
Fig. 27A and28 , eachplate 104 has a substantially C-shape that opens rearward when viewed in the left-right direction. As shown inFig. 27A , theplate 104 has: amain part 1040 positioned at a front part of the internal space of thecase 101 of thecartridge attachment section 110; a lower protrudingpart 1042 protruding from a lower end portion of themain part 1040 in therearward direction 52; and an upper protrudingpart 1044 protruding from an upper end portion of themain part 1040 in therearward direction 52. A gap or notchedarea 1046 is formed between the lower protrudingpart 1042 and the upper protrudingpart 1044 of theplate 104 in the up-down direction. - A bottom end of the
main part 1040 of theplate 104 is connected with the inner bottom surface of thecase 101 of thecartridge attachment section 110. A top end of themain part 1040 of theplate 104 is connected with the innertop surface 57 of thecase 101. Thus, themain part 1040 of theplate 104 extends over the entire length of the internal space of thecase 101 in the up-down direction. A front end of themain part 1040 of theplate 104 is connected with theinner end surface 59 of thecase 101. Themain part 1040 of theplate 104 extends from theinner end surface 59 of thecase 101 in therearward direction 52 to such a length that at least part of themain part 1040 is overlapped, in the front-rear direction, with at least part of theink supply portion 34 of theink cartridge 30 when theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached in thecartridge attachment section 110. More specifically, themain part 1040 extends in the front-rear direction such that part of themain part 1040 in the front-rear direction is disposed in a joint range JR that is defined in thecartridge attachment section 110. As shown inFig. 27B , the joint range JR is defined in the front-rear direction as such a range, in which theink supply portion 34 and theink needle 102 are overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction when theink supply portion 34 and theink needle 102 have been connected with each other. As shown inFig. 27A , theplate 104 is overlapped with a front part of theink supply portion 34 when viewed in the left-right direction because theink supply portion 34 is disposed at a vertical level between the upper and lower ends of theplate 104. - A front end of the lower protruding
part 1042 of theplate 104 is continuous with a lower rear end portion of themain part 1040 of theplate 104. A lower end of the lower protrudingpart 1042 of theplate 104 is connected with the inner bottom surface of thecase 101. A rear end of the lower protrudingpart 1042 of theplate 104 is disposed at an open end of theopening 112 of thecase 101. - A front end of the upper protruding
part 1044 of theplate 104 is continuous with the upper rear end portion of themain part 1040 of theplate 104. An upper end of the upper protrudingpart 1044 of theplate 104 is connected with the innertop surface 57 of thecase 101. A rear end of the upper protrudingpart 1044 of theplate 104 is disposed at the open end of theopening 112 of thecartridge attachment section 110. - The
lower protruding part 1042 and the upper protrudingpart 1044 of theplate 104 have such vertical lengths that the gap or notchedarea 1046 is formed between the lower protrudingpart 1042 and the upper protrudingpart 1044 of theplate 104 in the up-down direction. The notchedarea 1046 is positioned rearward of themain part 1040 of theplate 104, and is in communication with theopening 112. - The upper protruding
part 1044 of theplate 104 has: anintermediate region 1044A in the front-rear direction; arear region 1044B disposed rearward of theintermediate region 1044A; and afront region 1044C disposed frontward of theintermediate region 1044A. - The
intermediate region 1044A of the upper protrudingpart 1044 is overlapped, in the front-rear direction, with the position at which theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 on theink cartridge 30 contact thecontacts 106 in thecartridge attachment section 110 when theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110. In other words, theintermediate region 1044A of the upper protrudingpart 1044 is aligned with the contact positions, at which theelectrodes 65 contact thecontacts 106, in the up-down direction. It is noted that theelectrodes 65 are not overlapped with theplate 104 when viewed in the left-right direction because theelectrodes 65 are disposed at a vertical level higher than the upper end of theplate 104. - More specifically, the
intermediate region 1044A is disposed in an electrode-extending range ER that is defined in the front-rear direction. As shown inFig. 27B , the electrode-extending range ER is defined in the front-rear direction such that when theink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, theelectrodes 65 are disposed to extend in the electrode-extending range ER in the front-rear direction. The contact positions at which theelectrodes 65 are in contact with thecontacts 106 are therefore within the electrode-extending range ER in the front-rear direction. - In other words, in the state where the
ink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, the front ends of theelectrodes 65 are aligned with the front end of theintermediate region 1044A in the up-down direction, the rear ends of theelectrodes 65 are aligned with the rear end of theintermediate region 1044A in the up-down direction, and the contact positions between theelectrodes 65 and thecontacts 106 are aligned with a particular position in theintermediate region 1044A between the front and rear ends thereof. - That is, in the state where the
ink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, a distance of the front ends of theelectrodes 65 from the distal end (rear end) of theink needle 102 is equal to a distance of the front end of theintermediate region 1044A from the distal end of theink needle 102, a distance of the rear ends of theelectrodes 65 from the distal end of theink needle 102 is equal to a distance of the rear end of theintermediate region 1044A from the distal end of theink needle 102, and a distance of the particular position of theintermediate region 1044A from the distal end of theink needle 102 is equal to a distance from the distal end of theink needle 102 to the contact position between theelectrodes 65 and thecontacts 106. It is noted that the distal end of theink needle 102 is disposed at the rear end of the joint range JR in the front-rear direction. - As shown in
Fig. 27A , the gap between theintermediate region 1044A of the upper protrudingpart 1044 and the lower protrudingpart 1042 has a length G1 in the up-down direction. The gap between therear region 1044B of the upper protrudingpart 1044 and the lower protrudingpart 1042 has a length G2 in the up-down direction. The gap between thefront region 1044C of the upper protrudingpart 1044 and the lower protrudingpart 1042 has a length G3 in the up-down direction. The length G1 is smaller than the length G2, and is greater than the length G3. Thus, the size of the notchedarea 1046 in the up-down direction increases as proceeding toward theopening 112 in therearward direction 52. - As shown in
Fig. 27A , acover 1050 is pivotally supported by a housing (not shown) of theprinter 10 to open and close theopening 112. After theink cartridge 30 is completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, theopening 112 is closed by thecover 1050 as indicated by a solid line in the figure. Accordingly, even when theprinter 10 attached with theink cartridge 30 is dropped onto the floor, thecover 1050 prevents theink cartridge 30 from being detached from theprinter 10. Theink cartridge 30 can be inserted into or removed from thecartridge attachment section 110 when thecover 1050 is open as indicated by a two dot and chain line in the figure. - In the
ink cartridge 30 of the embodiment, as shown inFig. 27B , theink supply portion 34 is positioned at the lower end portion of theink cartridge 30, and theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 are positioned at theupper surface 39 of theink cartridge 30. With this configuration, theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 are distant away from theink supply portion 34 in the up-down direction. Hence, even when ink is scattered on theink supply portion 34, the ink may not be deposited on theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64. - More specifically, according to the present embodiment, the
electrodes 65 on theIC board 64 are disposed further away from theink supply portion 30, in comparison with the conventional structure in which the ink supply portion is positioned upward of the lower end portion of the ink cartridge as in the above-describedJapanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-129178 ink supply portion 30 comes off theink needle 102 and ink is scattered as a result of the impact, contamination of theelectrodes 65 with the spilled ink is less likely than the comparative example. - In addition, the
electrodes 65 of theIC board 64 are positioned upstream of theink supply portion 34 in the insertion direction. That is, theelectrodes 65 are positioned rearward of theink supply portion 34. Accordingly, a length of a path from theink supply portion 34 to theelectrodes 65 is increased to further avoid adhesion of the scattered ink onto theelectrodes 65. - Further, the
cartridge casing 130 and theouter lid 134 have such a portion that is positioned above theink supply portion 34 and protrudes further frontward relative to the front end of theink supply portion 34. Accordingly, even when theprinter 10 attached with theink cartridge 30 therein is dropped on the floor and ink leaks from the front end of theink supply portion 34, the portion of the ink cartridge that is disposed upward of theink supply portion 34 and frontward of the front end of theink supply portion 34 can receive ink leaking from theink supply portion 34. Therefore, theelectrodes 65 on theink cartridge 30 can be suppressed from being contaminated by ink. - In the
cartridge attachment section 110, themain part 1040 of theplate 104 fully extends in the entire vertical length of the inside of thecase 101 of thecartridge attachment section 110. Themain part 1040 of theplate 104 is overlapped with the joint range JR in the insertion direction (front-rear direction). Accordingly, themain part 1040 of theplate 104 enhances mechanical strength with respect to the connection between theink supply portion 34 and theink needle 102. Themain part 1040 of theplate 104 can protect the connecting position between theink supply portion 34 and theink needle 102. Accordingly, even when theprinter 10 is dropped on the floor, themain part 1040 of theplate 104 can moderate application of impacting force to theink supply portion 34 and theink needle 102, and therefore can avoid disengagement of theink cartridge 30 from theprinter 10. - The
intermediate region 1044A of the upper protrudingpart 1044 in theplate 104 is positioned at the electrode-extending range ER in the insertion direction (front-rear direction), and has a partial length relative to the entire length of the inside of thecase 101 in the up-down direction. Accordingly, the upper protrudingpart 1044 of theplate 104 can ensure strength for protecting the contact position between theelectrodes 65 and thecontacts 106, thereby avoiding theelectrodes 65 and thecontacts 106 from being damaged. - In addition, the
plate 104 is formed with the notchedarea 1046 at the position below the upper protrudingpart 1044. The dimension of the notchedarea 1046 in the vertical direction increases toward theopening 112. Accordingly, the user can easily access and hold by their fingers the left andright side walls ink cartridge 30 at their regions exposed through the notchedareas 1046 of theplates 104 when inserting or removing theink cartridge 30 relative to thecartridge attachment section 110. Hence, theink cartridge 30 can be easily attached to and detached from thecartridge attachment section 110. - With the above-described configuration, the
ink supply portion 34 and theelectrodes 65 can be protected against impacting force due to falling, and also user's operability for inserting and removing theink cartridge 30 can be ensured. - According to the above-described embodiment, even when the
printer 10 with theink cartridge 30 attached therein is dropped on the floor, theplate 104 can restrain fracture of theink supply portion 34 and theink needle 102, and can protect against damage to theelectrodes 65 and thecontacts 106 due to impacting force transmitted. Theplate 104 can also ensure user's operability for inserting and removing theink cartridge 30 to and from thecartridge attachment section 110. - Because the
electrodes 65 are distant away from theink supply portion 34, even when theink cartridge 30 is disengaged from theink supply portion 34 by the application of impacting force due to dropping of theprinter 30, ink adhesion to theelectrodes 65 can be restrained against scattering of the ink from theink supply portion 34. - Because the
cartridge attachment section 100 is partitioned by the plurality ofplates 104, theplates 104 can suppress theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 on theink cartridge 30 from being contaminated by ink leaking out of neighboringink cartridges 30. - According to the present embodiment, in the state where the
ink cartridge 30 has been completely attached to thecartridge attachment section 110, thelock surface 151, which is positioned rearward of theelectrodes 65 on thetop wall 39 of theink cartridge 30, is engaged with thelock shaft 145 provided at thecartridge attachment section 110 as shown inFig. 27B . Accordingly, even when theprinter 10 attached with theink cartridge 30 is accidentally dropped onto the floor, the engagement between thelock surface 151 and thelock shaft 145 can prevent theink cartridge 30 from being detached from thecartridge attachment section 110. - According to the present embodiment, as shown in
Fig. 27A , theink cartridge 30 has the light-blockingplate 67 on thetop wall 39 at a position frontward of theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64. The light-blockingplate 67 is for being detected by the sensing light emitted from theoptical sensor 113 shown inFig. 27B . Because theelectrodes 65 are disposed rearward of the light-blockingplate 67, the path of a large length is provided from theink supply portion 34 to theelectrodes 65 to avoid adhesion of scattered ink onto theelectrodes 65. - In the above-described embodiment, ink is exemplified as liquid. However, in place of ink, a pretreatment liquid that is ejected onto the recording paper prior to the ink during a printing operation may be stored in a liquid cartridge. Alternatively, water that is used for cleaning the
recording head 21 may be stored in a liquid cartridge. In other words, theink cartridge 30 described herein need not be a cartridge for storing ink. Instead, theink cartridge 30 may be a cartridge for storing any liquid that theprinter 10 consumes. - In the present disclosure, the
ink cartridge 30 is an example of a printing-fluid cartridge. Theprinter 10 is an example of a printing-fluid consuming device. Thecontacts 106 are an example of an electrical contact. Thecartridge casing 130 and theouter lid 134 are an example of a cartridge body. Thefirst storage chamber 32 and thesecond storage chamber 33 are an example of a storage chamber. The outer surface of thetop wall 39 facing upward is an example of an upper surface. Theink supply portion 34 is an example of a supply portion. Theelectrodes 65 are an example of an electrical interface. Therecording head 21 is an example of a printing-fluid consuming portion. Theink needle 102 is an example of a supply tube. Theplate 104 is an example of a plate. Themain part 1040 is an example of a main part. Thelower protruding part 1042 is an example of a lower protruding part. The upper protrudingpart 1044 is an example of a upper protruding part. Theintermediate region 1044A is an example of a first region. Therear region 1044B is an example of an second region. Thefront region 1044C is an example of a third region. The joint range JR is an example of a connecting position. A contact position between theelectrodes 65 and thecontacts 106 that is within the electrode-extending range ER in the front-rear direction is an example of a contact position. The left-right direction is an example of a widthwise direction. Theopening 112 is an example of an insertion opening. Thelock shaft 145 is an example of a lock portion. Theoptical sensor 113 is an example of a sensor. The light-blockingplate 67 is an example of a protrusion. The light-blockingsurface 67A is an example of a detection surface. -
- 1: system
- 30: ink cartridge
- 10: printer
- 110: cartridge attachment section
- 106: contacts
- 130: cartridge casing
- 134: outer lid
- 32: first storage chamber
- 33: second storage chamber
- 34: ink supply portion
- 65: electrodes
- 21: recording head
- 102: ink needle
- 104: plate
- 1040: main part
- 1042: lower protruding part
- 1044: upper protruding part
- 1046: notched area
- 1044A: intermediate region
- 1044B: rear region
Claims (9)
- A system comprising:a printing-fluid cartridge (30); anda printing-fluid consuming device (10) comprising:a cartridge attachment section (110) to which the printing-fluid cartridge (30) is attachable by insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge (30) in an insertion direction; andan electrical contact (106) provided at the cartridge attachment section (110);the printing-fluid cartridge (30) comprising:a cartridge body (130) having a storage chamber (32; 33) configured to store printing fluid, the cartridge body (130) having a lower end portion and an upper surface;a supply portion (34) disposed at the lower end portion and configured to supply the printing-fluid stored in the storage chamber (32; 33); andan electrical interface (65) disposed at the upper surface and positioned upstream relative to the supply portion (34) in the insertion direction, the electrical interface (65) being configured to be in contact with the electrical contact (106) by the insertion;the printing-fluid consuming device (10) further comprising:a printing-fluid consuming portion;a supply tube (20) provided at the cartridge attachment section (110), the supply tube (20) being connectable to the supply portion (34) to allow the printing fluid stored in the storage chamber (32; 33) to flow therethrough toward the printing-fluid consuming portion; anda plate (104) provided at the cartridge attachment section (110), the plate (104) facing the printing-fluid cartridge (30) in a widthwise direction perpendicular to both of the insertion direction and an up-down direction in an attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge (30) where the supply portion (34) and the supply tube (20) are connected together,the plate (104) having:a main part (1040) extending over an entire length of an inside of the cartridge attachment section (110) in the up-down direction, the main part (1040) having a lower end portion and an upper end portion;a lower protruding part (1042) protruding from the lower end portion of the main part (1040) in an opposite direction opposite to the insertion direction; andan upper protruding part (1044) protruding from the upper end portion of the main part (1040) in the opposite direction, the upper protruding part (1044) being spaced away from the lower protruding part (1042) to provide a gap between the lower protruding part (1042) and the upper protruding part (1044) in the up-down direction,the main part (1040) of the plate (104) and the supply portion (34) being at least partly overlapped with each other when viewed in the widthwise direction in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge (30),the upper protruding part (1044) having a first region (1044A) whose distance from an upstream end of the supply tube (20) in the insertion direction is equal to a distance of the electrical interface (65) from the upstream end of the supply tube (20) in the insertion direction,the upper protruding part (1044) further having a second region (1044B) positioned upstream relative to the first region (1044A) in the insertion direction,a length (G1) of the gap between the lower protruding part (1042) and the first region (1044A) of the upper protruding part (1044) being smaller than a length of the gap between the lower protruding part (1042) and the second region (1044B) of the upper protruding part (1044).
- The system according to claim 1, wherein, in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge (30), the supply tube (20) and the supply portion (34) are connected together at a connecting position in the insertion direction, and
wherein the main part (1040) of the plate (104) is overlapped with the connecting position when viewed in the widthwise direction in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge (30). - The system according to claim 1 or 2, wherein, in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge (30), the electrical interface (65) is in contact with the electrical contact (106) at a contact position, and
wherein in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge (30), a distance of a portion in the first region (1044A) of the upper protruding part (1044) from the upstream end of the supply tube (20) in the insertion direction is equal to a distance of the contact position from the upstream end of the supply tube (20) in the insertion direction. - The system according to any one of claims 1 through 3, wherein, in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge (30), the upper protruding part (1044) of the plate (104) further has a third region (1044C) positioned downstream relative to the first region (1044A) in the insertion direction, the length of the gap between the lower protruding part (1042) and the first region (1044A) of the upper protruding part (1044) being greater than a length of the gap between the lower protruding part (1042) and the third region (1044C) of the upper protruding part (1044).
- The system according to any one of claims 1 through 4, wherein a plurality of the plates (104) are provided in the cartridge attachment section (110) so as to be arrayed in the widthwise direction with a space being formed between neighboring plates (104), the printing-fluid cartridge (30) being attached to the cartridge attachment section (110) at a position between the neighboring plates (104).
- The system according to any one of claims 1 through 5, wherein the cartridge body (130) has a portion positioned upward relative to the supply portion (34) and downstream relative to a downstream end of the supply portion (34) in the insertion direction.
- The system according to any one of claims 1 through 6, wherein the cartridge attachment section (110) has an upstream end in the insertion direction formed with an insertion opening (102),wherein the printing-fluid consuming device (10) further comprises a cover (1050) configured to open and close the insertion opening (102), andwherein the cover (1050) is closed in the attached state of the printing-fluid cartridge (30).
- The system according to any one of claims 1 through 7, wherein the printing-fluid consuming device (10) further comprises a lock portion provided at the cartridge attachment section (110), and
wherein the cartridge body (130) has a lock surface (151) disposed at the upper surface, the lock surface (151) being positioned upstream relative to the electrical interface (65) in the insertion direction, the lock surface (151) being configured to engage with the lock portion. - The system according to any one of claims 1 through 8, wherein the printing-fluid consuming device (10) further comprises a sensor (113) provided at the cartridge attachment section (110) and configured to emit a sensing light travelling in the widthwise direction, and
wherein the printing-fluid cartridge (30) further comprises a protrusion (67) disposed at the upper surface, the protrusion (67) being positioned downstream relative to the electrical interface (65) in the insertion direction, the protrusion (67) having a detection surface (67A) configured to be detected by the sensor (113).
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2017/027715 WO2019026135A1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | System including printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming device |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
EP3661752A1 EP3661752A1 (en) | 2020-06-10 |
EP3661752B1 true EP3661752B1 (en) | 2023-04-05 |
Family
ID=59593143
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP17751863.6A Active EP3661752B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | System including printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
EP (1) | EP3661752B1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2019026135A1 (en) |
Family Cites Families (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2001010081A (en) * | 1999-06-30 | 2001-01-16 | Canon Inc | Ink jet cartridge, ink jet device and manufacture of ink jet cartridge |
US7134747B2 (en) * | 2002-09-30 | 2006-11-14 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Ink container, recording head and recording device using same |
CN100429080C (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2008-10-29 | 兄弟工业株式会社 | Image recording apparatus |
JP2013129178A (en) * | 2011-12-22 | 2013-07-04 | Brother Industries Ltd | Printing fluid cartridge |
-
2017
- 2017-07-31 EP EP17751863.6A patent/EP3661752B1/en active Active
- 2017-07-31 WO PCT/JP2017/027715 patent/WO2019026135A1/en unknown
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
WO2019026135A1 (en) | 2019-02-07 |
EP3661752A1 (en) | 2020-06-10 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US11590758B2 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge having interfering surface, and set of the printing-fluid cartridges | |
US11077669B2 (en) | Liquid cartridge capable of reducing leakage of liquid from liquid storage chamber | |
US11890876B2 (en) | Liquid cartridge provided with liquid supply portion having guide groove | |
EP3623161B1 (en) | Liquid cartridge and system therefor | |
US10118399B2 (en) | Liquid cartridge provided with snap-fit mechanism capable of suppressing detachment of cap | |
US10449771B2 (en) | Liquid cartridge capable of improving visibility to liquid stored in liquid storage chamber | |
WO2019026123A1 (en) | Liquid cartridge | |
EP3661752B1 (en) | System including printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming device | |
WO2019026105A1 (en) | Liquid cartridge | |
EP3437877B1 (en) | Liquid cartridge and system therefor | |
WO2019026121A1 (en) | Liquid cartridge and system therefor | |
EP3437876B1 (en) | System including a plurality of printing-fluid cartridges and a printing-fluid consuming apparatus | |
EP3437874B1 (en) | Liquid cartridge and system therefor | |
US10343410B2 (en) | Liquid cartridge capable of reducing remaining amount of liquid in liquid storage chamber | |
WO2019026127A1 (en) | Liquid cartridge and system therefor |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: UNKNOWN |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE INTERNATIONAL PUBLICATION HAS BEEN MADE |
|
PUAI | Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE |
|
17P | Request for examination filed |
Effective date: 20200213 |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
AX | Request for extension of the european patent |
Extension state: BA ME |
|
DAV | Request for validation of the european patent (deleted) | ||
DAX | Request for extension of the european patent (deleted) | ||
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED |
|
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20221208 |
|
GRAS | Grant fee paid |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3 |
|
GRAA | (expected) grant |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE PATENT HAS BEEN GRANTED |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: B1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: GB Ref legal event code: FG4D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R096 Ref document number: 602017067448 Country of ref document: DE |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: CH Ref legal event code: EP |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: AT Ref legal event code: REF Ref document number: 1557939 Country of ref document: AT Kind code of ref document: T Effective date: 20230415 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: IE Ref legal event code: FG4D |
|
P01 | Opt-out of the competence of the unified patent court (upc) registered |
Effective date: 20230529 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: LT Ref legal event code: MG9D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: NL Ref legal event code: MP Effective date: 20230405 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: AT Ref legal event code: MK05 Ref document number: 1557939 Country of ref document: AT Kind code of ref document: T Effective date: 20230405 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: NL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: PT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230807 Ref country code: NO Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230705 Ref country code: ES Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: AT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: RS Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: PL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: LV Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: LT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: IS Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230805 Ref country code: HR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: GR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230706 Ref country code: AL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: FI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R097 Ref document number: 602017067448 Country of ref document: DE |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SK Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SM Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: SK Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: RO Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: EE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: DK Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: CZ Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 |
|
PLBE | No opposition filed within time limit |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009261 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: NO OPPOSITION FILED WITHIN TIME LIMIT |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: MC Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: MC Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: CH Ref legal event code: PL |
|
26N | No opposition filed |
Effective date: 20240108 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: BE Ref legal event code: MM Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: LU Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: LU Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: IE Ref legal event code: MM4A |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: CH Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: IT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230405 Ref country code: BE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: IE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: GB Payment date: 20240613 Year of fee payment: 8 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: IE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: FR Payment date: 20240613 Year of fee payment: 8 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: DE Payment date: 20240613 Year of fee payment: 8 |